blob: 69423e8758ad66420e871a08f5e31a45848899fc [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau79158882009-06-09 11:59:08 +02005 version 1.4
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreaub05613d2010-02-02 10:18:28 +01007 2010/02/02
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100453.4. Userlists
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046
474. Proxies
484.1. Proxy keywords matrix
494.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
50
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +0100515. Server and default-server options
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052
536. HTTP header manipulation
54
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100557. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200567.1. Matching integers
577.2. Matching strings
587.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
597.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
607.5. Available matching criteria
617.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
627.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
637.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
647.6. Pre-defined ACLs
657.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
Cyril Bonté7d38afb2010-02-03 20:41:26 +0100667.8. Pattern extraction
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067
688. Logging
698.1. Log levels
708.2. Log formats
718.2.1. Default log format
728.2.2. TCP log format
738.2.3. HTTP log format
748.3. Advanced logging options
758.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
768.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
778.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
788.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
798.4. Timing events
808.5. Session state at disconnection
818.6. Non-printable characters
828.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
838.8. Capturing HTTP headers
848.9. Examples of logs
85
869. Statistics and monitoring
879.1. CSV format
889.2. Unix Socket commands
89
90
911. Quick reminder about HTTP
92----------------------------
93
94When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
95fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
96on almost anything found in the contents.
97
98However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
99formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
100correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
101
102
1031.1. The HTTP transaction model
104-------------------------------
105
106The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100107to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200108from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
109connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
110will involve a new connection :
111
112 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
113
114In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
115establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
116by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
117length.
118
119Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
120to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
121however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
122response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
123header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
124
125 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
126
127Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
128power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
129but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
130a smaller value. HAProxy currently does not support the HTTP keep-alive mode,
131but knows how to transform it to the close mode.
132
133A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
134keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
135second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
136page :
137
138 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
139
140This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
141latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
142correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
143the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
144server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
145
146Right now, HAProxy only supports the first mode (HTTP close) if it needs to
147process the request. This means that for each request, there will be one TCP
148connection. If keep-alive or pipelining are required, HAProxy will still
149support them, but will only see the first request and the first response of
150each transaction. While this is generally problematic with regards to logs,
151content switching or filtering, it most often causes no problem for persistence
152with cookie insertion.
153
154
1551.2. HTTP request
156-----------------
157
158First, let's consider this HTTP request :
159
160 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100161 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200162 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
163 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
164 3 User-agent: my small browser
165 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
166 5 Accept: image/png
167
168
1691.2.1. The Request line
170-----------------------
171
172Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
173
174 - a METHOD : GET
175 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
176 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
177
178All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
179which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
180followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
181is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
182desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
183the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
184
185The URI itself can have several forms :
186
187 - A "relative URI" :
188
189 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
190
191 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
192 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
193
194 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
195
196 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
197
198 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
199 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
200 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
201 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
202 must accept this form too.
203
204 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
205 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
206 capabilities.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100207
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200208 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
209 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
210 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
211 other protocols too.
212
213In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
214mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
215on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
216It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
217specific to the language, framework or application in use.
218
219
2201.2.2. The request headers
221--------------------------
222
223The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
224beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
225an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
226Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
227values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
228encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
229the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
230define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
231
232Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
233their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
234"Connection:" header).
235
236The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
237that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
238is one valid form of empty line.
239
240Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
241headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
242about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
243application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
244
245Important note:
246 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
247 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
248 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
249 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
250
251
2521.3. HTTP response
253------------------
254
255An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
256messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
257
258 Line Contents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100259 number
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200260 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
261 2 Content-length: 350
262 3 Content-Type: text/html
263
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200264As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
265codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
266response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
Willy Tarreau5843d1a2010-02-01 15:13:32 +0100267continue to post its request for instance. In the case of a status 100 response
268the requested information will be carried by the next non-100 response message
269following the informational one. This implies that multiple responses may be
270sent to a single request, and that this only works when keep-alive is enabled
271(1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only). HAProxy handles these messages and is able to
272correctly forward and skip them, and only process the next non-100 response. As
273such, these messages are neither logged nor transformed, unless explicitly
274state otherwise. Status 101 messages indicate that the protocol is changing
275over the same connection and that haproxy must switch to tunnel mode, just as
276if a CONNECT had occurred. Then the Upgrade header would contain additional
277information about the type of protocol the connection is switching to.
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200278
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200279
2801.3.1. The Response line
281------------------------
282
283Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
284
285 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
286 - a status code : 200
287 - a reason : OK
288
289The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200290 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200291 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
292 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
293 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
294 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
295
296Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100297"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200298found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
299messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
300or "Authentication Required".
301
302Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
303
304 Code When / reason
305 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
306 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
307 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
308 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
309 400 for an invalid or too large request
310 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
311 accessing the stats page)
312 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
313 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
314 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
315 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
316 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
317 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
318 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
319 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
320 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
321
322The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3234.2).
324
325
3261.3.2. The response headers
327---------------------------
328
329Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
330the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
331details.
332
333
3342. Configuring HAProxy
335----------------------
336
3372.1. Configuration file format
338------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200339
340HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
341
342 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
343 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
344 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
345 "frontend" and "backend".
346
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100347The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
348referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
349delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100350preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100351escaped by doubling them.
352
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200353
3542.2. Time format
355----------------
356
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100357Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100358values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
359otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
360numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
361for every keyword. Supported units are :
362
363 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
364 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
365 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
366 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
367 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
368 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
369
370
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003713. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200372--------------------
373
374Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
375are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
376of them have command-line equivalents.
377
378The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
379
380 * Process management and security
381 - chroot
382 - daemon
383 - gid
384 - group
385 - log
386 - nbproc
387 - pidfile
388 - uid
389 - ulimit-n
390 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200391 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200392 - node
393 - description
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100394
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200395 * Performance tuning
396 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100397 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200398 - noepoll
399 - nokqueue
400 - nopoll
401 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100402 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200403 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200404 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100405 - tune.maxaccept
406 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200407 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100408 - tune.rcvbuf.client
409 - tune.rcvbuf.server
410 - tune.sndbuf.client
411 - tune.sndbuf.server
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100412
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200413 * Debugging
414 - debug
415 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200416
417
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004183.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200419------------------------------------
420
421chroot <jail dir>
422 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
423 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
424 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
425 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
426 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
427 empty and unwritable to anyone.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100428
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200429daemon
430 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
431 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
432 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
433
434gid <number>
435 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
436 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
437 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
438 See also "group" and "uid".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100439
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200440group <group name>
441 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
442 See also "gid" and "user".
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100443
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200444log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200445 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
446 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100447 configured with "log global".
448
449 <address> can be one of:
450
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100451 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100452 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
453 port).
454
455 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
456 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
457 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
458 writeable).
459
460 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200461
462 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
463 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
464 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
465
466 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200467 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
468 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
469 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
470 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
471 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
472 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200473
474 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
475
476nbproc <number>
477 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
478 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
479 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
480 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
481 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
482
483pidfile <pidfile>
484 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
485 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
486 starting the process. See also "daemon".
487
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200488stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200489 [level <level>]
490
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200491 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
492 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100493 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200494 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
495
496 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
497 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
498 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
499 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
500 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
501
502 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
503 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
504 counters).
505
506 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
507 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100508
509 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
510 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
511 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
512 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
513 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
514 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
515 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200516
517stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
518 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
519 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100520 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200521
522stats maxconn <connections>
523 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
524 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
525
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200526uid <number>
527 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
528 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
529 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
530 one. See also "gid" and "user".
531
532ulimit-n <number>
533 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
534 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
535 option.
536
537user <user name>
538 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
539 See also "uid" and "group".
540
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200541node <name>
542 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
543
544 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
545 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
546 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
547 traffic.
548
549description <text>
550 Add a text that describes the instance.
551
552 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
553 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
554 "<" and ">" characters.
555
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005573.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200558-----------------------
559
560maxconn <number>
561 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
562 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
563 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
564 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
565
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100566maxpipes <number>
567 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
568 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
569 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
570 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
571 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
572 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
573
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200574noepoll
575 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
576 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
577 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
578
579nokqueue
580 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
581 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
582 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
583
584nopoll
585 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
586 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100587 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200588 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
589 "nokqueue".
590
591nosepoll
592 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
593 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
594 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
595
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100596nosplice
597 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
598 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
599 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100600 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100601 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
602 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
603 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
604 "option splice-response".
605
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200606spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
607 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
608 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
609 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
610 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
611 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
612
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200613tune.bufsize <number>
614 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
615 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
616 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
617 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
618 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
619 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
620 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
621 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
622
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100623tune.maxaccept <number>
624 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
625 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
626 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100627 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100628 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
629 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100630 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100631 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
632
633tune.maxpollevents <number>
634 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
635 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
636 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
637 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
638 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
639
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200640tune.maxrewrite <number>
641 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
642 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
643 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
644 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
645 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
646 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
647 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
648 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
649 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
650 bufsize.
651
Willy Tarreaue803de22010-01-21 17:43:04 +0100652tune.rcvbuf.client <number>
653tune.rcvbuf.server <number>
654 Forces the kernel socket receive buffer size on the client or the server side
655 to the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
656 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
657 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
658 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
659 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
660 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
661
662tune.sndbuf.client <number>
663tune.sndbuf.server <number>
664 Forces the kernel socket send buffer size on the client or the server side to
665 the specified value in bytes. This value applies to all TCP/HTTP frontends
666 and backends. It should normally never be set, and the default size (0) lets
667 the kernel autotune this value depending on the amount of available memory.
668 However it can sometimes help to set it to very low values (eg: 4096) in
669 order to save kernel memory by preventing it from buffering too large amounts
670 of received data. Lower values will significantly increase CPU usage though.
671 Another use case is to prevent write timeouts with extremely slow clients due
672 to the kernel waiting for a large part of the buffer to be read before
673 notifying haproxy again.
674
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200675
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006763.3. Debugging
677--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200678
679debug
680 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
681 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
682 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
683 system startup.
684
685quiet
686 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
687 line argument "-q".
688
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006893.4. Userlists
690--------------
691It is possible to control access to frontend/backend/listen sections or to
692http stats by allowing only authenticated and authorized users. To do this,
693it is required to create at least one userlist and to define users.
694
695userlist <listname>
696 Creates new userlist with name <listname>. Many indepenend userlists can be
697 used to store authentication & authorization data for independent customers.
698
699group <groupname> [users <user>,<user>,(...)]
700 Adds group <gropname> to the current userlist. It is also possible to
701 attach users to this group by using a comma separated list of names
702 proceeded by "users" keyword.
703
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100704user <username> [password|insecure-password <password>]
705 [groups <group>,<group>,(...)]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100706 Adds user <username> to the current userlist. Both secure (encrypted) and
707 insecure (unencrypted) passwords can be used. Encrypted passwords are
708 evaluated using the crypt(3) function so dependig of the system's
709 capabilities, different algoritms are supported. For example modern Glibc
710 based Linux system supports MD5, SHA-256, SHA-512 and of course classic,
711 DES-based method of crypting passwords.
712
713
714 Example:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100715 userlist L1
716 group G1 users tiger,scott
717 group G2 users xdb,scott
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100718
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100719 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx9za9667qe4(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91
720 user scott insecure-password elgato
721 user xdb insecure-password hello
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100722
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100723 userlist L2
724 group G1
725 group G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100726
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +0100727 user tiger password $6$k6y3o.eP$JlKBx(...)xHSwRv6J.C0/D7cV91 groups G1
728 user scott insecure-password elgato groups G1,G2
729 user xdb insecure-password hello groups G2
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100730
731 Please note that both lists are functionally identical.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200732
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007334. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200734----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100735
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200736Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
737 - defaults <name>
738 - frontend <name>
739 - backend <name>
740 - listen <name>
741
742A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
743its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
744section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100745section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200746
747A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
748connections.
749
750A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
751to forward incoming connections.
752
753A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
754parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
755
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100756All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
757'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
758case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
759
760Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
761logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
762proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
763However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
764name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
765
766Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
767and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100768bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100769protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
770modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
771arbitrary criteria.
772
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100773
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007744.1. Proxy keywords matrix
775--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100776
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200777The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
778limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
779they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
780limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200781listed with [no] can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200782option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200783and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
784with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
785specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100786
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200787
788keyword defaults frontend listen backend
789----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100790acl - X X X
791appsession - - X X
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100792backlog X X X -
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +0100793balance X - X X
794bind - X X -
795bind-process X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200796block - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100797capture cookie - X X -
798capture request header - X X -
799capture response header - X X -
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100800clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100801contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200802cookie X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +0100803default-server X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100804default_backend X X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200805description - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100806disabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200807dispatch - - X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100808enabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200809errorfile X X X X
810errorloc X X X X
811errorloc302 X X X X
812errorloc303 X X X X
813fullconn X - X X
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +0100814grace X X X X
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +0200815hash-type X - X X
Willy Tarreaudbc36f62007-11-30 12:29:11 +0100816http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +0100817http-request - X X X
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +0200818id - X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200819log X X X X
820maxconn X X X -
821mode X X X X
Willy Tarreauc7246fc2007-12-02 17:31:20 +0100822monitor fail - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200823monitor-net X X X -
824monitor-uri X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100825[no] option abortonclose X - X X
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +0200826[no] option accept-invalid-
827 http-request X X X -
828[no] option accept-invalid-
829 http-response X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100830[no] option allbackups X - X X
831[no] option checkcache X - X X
832[no] option clitcpka X X X -
833[no] option contstats X X X -
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +0200834[no] option dontlog-normal X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100835[no] option dontlognull X X X -
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +0100836[no] option forceclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200837option forwardfor X X X X
838option httpchk X - X X
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +0100839[no] option http-server-
840 close X X X X
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +0100841[no] option http-use-proxy-
842 header X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100843[no] option httpclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200844option httplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200845[no] option http_proxy X X X X
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +0200846[no] option independant-
847 streams X X X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki213014e2009-09-27 15:50:02 +0200848[no] option log-health- X - X X
849 checks
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +0200850[no] option log-separate-
851 errors X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100852[no] option logasap X X X -
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +0100853option mysql-check X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100854[no] option nolinger X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200855option originalto X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100856[no] option persist X - X X
857[no] option redispatch X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200858option smtpchk X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +0200859[no] option socket-stats X X X -
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100860[no] option splice-auto X X X X
861[no] option splice-request X X X X
862[no] option splice-response X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100863[no] option srvtcpka X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200864option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +0200865[no] option tcp-smart-
866 accept X X X -
Willy Tarreau39bb9be2009-10-17 16:04:09 +0200867[no] option tcp-smart-
868 connect X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200869option tcpka X X X X
870option tcplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100871[no] option transparent X - X X
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +0200872persist rdp-cookie X - X X
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +0100873rate-limit sessions X X X -
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +0200874redirect - X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100875redisp X - X X (deprecated)
876redispatch X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200877reqadd - X X X
878reqallow - X X X
879reqdel - X X X
880reqdeny - X X X
881reqiallow - X X X
882reqidel - X X X
883reqideny - X X X
884reqipass - X X X
885reqirep - X X X
886reqisetbe - X X X
887reqitarpit - X X X
888reqpass - X X X
889reqrep - X X X
890reqsetbe - X X X
891reqtarpit - X X X
892retries X - X X
893rspadd - X X X
894rspdel - X X X
895rspdeny - X X X
896rspidel - X X X
897rspideny - X X X
898rspirep - X X X
899rsprep - X X X
900server - - X X
901source X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100902srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200903stats auth X - X X
904stats enable X - X X
905stats realm X - X X
Willy Tarreaubbd42122007-07-25 07:26:38 +0200906stats refresh X - X X
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200907stats scope X - X X
908stats uri X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzkid9db9272007-10-15 10:05:11 +0200909stats hide-version X - X X
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +0200910tcp-request content accept - X X -
911tcp-request content reject - X X -
912tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +0100913timeout check X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100914timeout client X X X -
915timeout clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
916timeout connect X - X X
917timeout contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +0100918timeout http-keep-alive X X X X
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +0200919timeout http-request X X X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100920timeout queue X - X X
921timeout server X - X X
922timeout srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau51c9bde2008-01-06 13:40:03 +0100923timeout tarpit X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100924transparent X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200925use_backend - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200926----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
927keyword defaults frontend listen backend
928
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100929
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02009304.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
931---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100932
933This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
934
935
936acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
937 Declare or complete an access list.
938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
939 no | yes | yes | yes
940 Example:
941 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
942 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
943 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
944
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200945 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100946
947
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100948appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
949 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100950 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
951 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
952 no | no | yes | yes
953 Arguments :
954 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
955 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
956
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100957 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100958 checked in each cookie value.
959
960 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
961 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
962 milliseconds.
963
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200964 request-learn
965 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
966 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
967 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
968 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
969 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
970 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
971
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100972 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
973 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
974 data following this prefix.
975
976 Example :
977 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
978
979 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
980 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
981
982 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
983 2 modes are currently supported :
984 - path-parameters :
985 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
986 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
987 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
988 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
989 - query-string :
990 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
991 query string.
992
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100993 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
994 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
995 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
996 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100997 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
998 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
999 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001000 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
1001 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
1002
1003 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
1004
1005 Example :
1006 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
1007
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01001008 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie", "balance", "stick" and "stick-table".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001009
1010
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +01001011backlog <conns>
1012 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
1013 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1014 yes | yes | yes | no
1015 Arguments :
1016 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
1017 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
1018 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
1019
1020 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
1021 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
1022 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
1023 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
1024 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
1025 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
1026 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
1027 backlog parameter.
1028
1029 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
1030 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
1031 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
1032
1033 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
1034
1035
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001036balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001037balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001038 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
1039 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1040 yes | no | yes | yes
1041 Arguments :
1042 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
1043 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
1044 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
1045 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
1046
1047 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1048 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
1049 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
1050 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +02001051 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
1052 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
1053 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
1054 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
1055 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
1056 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
1057 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
1058 it, so that you don't worry.
1059
1060 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
1061 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
1062 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
1063 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
1064 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
1065 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
1066 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
1067 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001068
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +01001069 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
1070 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
1071 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
1072 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
1073 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
1074 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
1075 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
1076 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
1077
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001078 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
1079 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
1080 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
1081 address will always reach the same server as long as no
1082 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
1083 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1084 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1085 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001086 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001087 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001088 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1089 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1090 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001091
1092 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1093 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1094 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1095 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1096 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1097 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1098 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001099 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1100 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1101 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001102
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001103 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1104 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1105 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1106 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1107 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1108 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1109 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1110 URIs start with a leading "/".
1111
1112 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1113 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1114 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1115 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1116
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001117 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001118 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1119
1120 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1121 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1122 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1123 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1124 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1125 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1126 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1127 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1128 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1129 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1130 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1131 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1132 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1133 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1134 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1135 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1136 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1137 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1138 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1139 be randomly balanced if at all.
1140
1141 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1142 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1143 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1144 server will receive the request.
1145
1146 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1147 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1148 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1149 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1150 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001151 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1152 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1153 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001154
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001155 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1156 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1157 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001158 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001159 algorithm is applied instead.
1160
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001161 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001162 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1163 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1164 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1165
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001166 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1167 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1168 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1169
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001170 rdp-cookie
1171 rdp-cookie(name)
1172 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1173 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1174 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1175 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1176 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1177 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001178 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001179 used instead.
1180
1181 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1182 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1183 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1184 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1185
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001186 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1187 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1188 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1189
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001190 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001191 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1192 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001193
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001194 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001195 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001196
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001197 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1198 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1199 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001200
1201 Examples :
1202 balance roundrobin
1203 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001204 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001205 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1206 balance hdr(host)
1207 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001208
1209 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1210 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1211
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001212 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001213 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1214 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1215 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1216 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1217
1218 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1219 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1220 defaults to 16 kB.
1221
1222 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1223 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1224
1225 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1226 Round Robin.
1227
1228 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1229 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1230 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1231 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1232
1233 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1234
1235 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001236 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001237 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1238 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1239 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001240
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001241 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1242 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001243
1244
1245bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...]
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001246bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] interface <interface>
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001247bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001248bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] transparent
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001249bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] id <id>
1250bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] name <name>
Willy Tarreau53319c92009-11-28 08:21:29 +01001251bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001252 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1253 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1254 no | yes | yes | no
1255 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001256 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1257 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1258 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1259 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1260 special address "0.0.0.0".
1261
1262 <port> is the TCP port number the proxy will listen on. The port is
1263 mandatory. Note that in the case of an IPv6 address, the port
1264 is always the number after the last colon (':').
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001265
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001266 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1267 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1268 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1269 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1270 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1271 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1272 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1273 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1274 privileges.
1275
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001276 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1277 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1278 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1279 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1280 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1281 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1282 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1283 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1284
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001285 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1286 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1287 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1288 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001289
1290 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1291
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001292 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1293 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1294 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001295 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001296 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1297 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1298 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1299 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1300 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001301
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001302 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1303 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1304 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1305 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1306 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1307 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1308 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1309 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1310 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1311 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1312 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1313 with front firewalls which would see an established
1314 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1315
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001316 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1317 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1318 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1319 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1320 in a frontend.
1321
1322 Example :
1323 listen http_proxy
1324 bind :80,:443
1325 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1326
1327 See also : "source".
1328
1329
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001330bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1331 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1332 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1333 yes | yes | yes | yes
1334 Arguments :
1335 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1336 may be used to override a default value.
1337
1338 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1339 option may be combined with other numbers.
1340
1341 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1342 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1343 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1344 missing from all processes.
1345
1346 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1347 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1348 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1349 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1350
1351 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1352 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1353 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1354 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1355 and 'even' instances.
1356
1357 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1358 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1359 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1360 32.
1361
1362 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1363 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1364
1365 Example :
1366 listen app_ip1
1367 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1368 bind_process odd
1369
1370 listen app_ip2
1371 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1372 bind_process even
1373
1374 listen management
1375 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1376 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1377
1378 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1379
1380
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001381block { if | unless } <condition>
1382 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1383 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1384 no | yes | yes | yes
1385
1386 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1387 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001388 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001389 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1390 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1391 "block" statements per instance.
1392
1393 Example:
1394 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1395 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1396 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1397 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1398
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001399 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001400
1401
1402capture cookie <name> len <length>
1403 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1404 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1405 no | yes | yes | no
1406 Arguments :
1407 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1408 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1409 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1410 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1411 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1412
1413 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1414 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1415 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1416 right if it exceeds <length>.
1417
1418 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1419 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1420 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1421 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1422
1423 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1424 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1425 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1426
1427 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1428 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1429 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1430 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001431 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001432 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1433
1434 Example:
1435 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1436
1437 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001438 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001439
1440
1441capture request header <name> len <length>
1442 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1443 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1444 no | yes | yes | no
1445 Arguments :
1446 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001447 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001448 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1449 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1450 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1451
1452 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1453 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1454 it exceeds <length>.
1455
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001456 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001457 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1458 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001459 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1460 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1461 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1462 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001463 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001464 environments to find where the request came from.
1465
1466 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1467 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1468 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1469 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001470
1471 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1472 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1473 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1474 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1475
1476 Example:
1477 capture request header Host len 15
1478 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1479 capture request header Referrer len 15
1480
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001481 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001482 about logging.
1483
1484
1485capture response header <name> len <length>
1486 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1487 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1488 no | yes | yes | no
1489 Arguments :
1490 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001491 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001492 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1493 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1494 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1495
1496 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1497 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1498 it exceeds <length>.
1499
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001500 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001501 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1502 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1503 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001504 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1505 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1506 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1507 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001508
1509 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1510 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1511 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1512 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1513
1514 Example:
1515 capture response header Content-length len 9
1516 capture response header Location len 15
1517
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001518 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001519 about logging.
1520
1521
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001522clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001523 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1524 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1525 yes | yes | yes | no
1526 Arguments :
1527 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1528 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1529 as explained at the top of this document.
1530
1531 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1532 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1533 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1534 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1535 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1536 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1537 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1538 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001539 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001540 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1541 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1542
1543 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1544 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1545 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1546 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1547 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1548 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1549
1550 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1551 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1552
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001553 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1554 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001555
1556
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01001557contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001558 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1559 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1560 yes | no | yes | yes
1561 Arguments :
1562 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1563 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1564 as explained at the top of this document.
1565
1566 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001567 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01001568 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001569 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1570 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1571 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1572 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1573
1574 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1575 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1576 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1577 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1578 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1579 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1580
1581 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1582 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1583 instead.
1584
1585 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1586 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1587
1588
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001589cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001590 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001591 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1592 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1593 yes | no | yes | yes
1594 Arguments :
1595 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1596 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1597 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1598 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1599 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1600 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1601 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1602 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1603 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1604
1605 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1606 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1607 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1608 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1609 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1610 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1611 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1612 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1613 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1614 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1615 "insert" and "prefix".
1616
1617 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1618 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1619 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1620 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1621 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1622 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1623 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1624 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1625 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1626
1627 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1628 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1629 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1630 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1631 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1632 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1633 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1634 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1635 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1636 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1637 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1638
1639 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1640 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1641 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1642 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1643 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1644 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1645 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1646 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1647 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1648 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1649
1650 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1651 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1652 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1653 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1654 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1655 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1656 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1657 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1658 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1659
1660 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1661 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1662 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1663 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1664 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1665 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1666 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1667 persistence cookie in the cache.
1668 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1669
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001670 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001671 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001672 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1673 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1674 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1675 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1676 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1677 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001678
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001679 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1680 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1681 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1682 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001683
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001684 Examples :
1685 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1686 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1687 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1688
1689 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1690
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001691
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001692default-server [param*]
1693 Change default options for a server in a backend
1694 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1695 yes | no | yes | yes
1696 Arguments:
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001697 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "default-server"
1698 keyword accepts an important number of options and has a complete
1699 section dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more
1700 details.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001701
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001702 Example :
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01001703 default-server inter 1000 weight 13
1704
1705 See also: "server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001706
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01001707
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001708default_backend <backend>
1709 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1710 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1711 yes | yes | yes | no
1712 Arguments :
1713 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1714
1715 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1716 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1717 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1718 will catch all undetermined requests.
1719
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001720 Example :
1721
1722 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1723 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1724 default_backend dynamic
1725
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001726 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1727
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001728
1729disabled
1730 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1731 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1732 yes | yes | yes | yes
1733 Arguments : none
1734
1735 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1736 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1737 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1738 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1739 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1740 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1741 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1742
1743 See also : "enabled"
1744
1745
1746enabled
1747 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1748 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1749 yes | yes | yes | yes
1750 Arguments : none
1751
1752 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1753 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1754
1755 See also : "disabled"
1756
1757
1758errorfile <code> <file>
1759 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1760 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1761 yes | yes | yes | yes
1762 Arguments :
1763 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1764 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1765
1766 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001767 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001768 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001769 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1770 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001771
1772 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1773 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1774 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1775
1776 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1777 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1778 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1779 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1780
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001781 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1782 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1783 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1784 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1785 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1786 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1787
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001788 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1789 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1790 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001791 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001792 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1793
1794 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1795
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001796 Example :
1797 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1798 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1799 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1800
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001801
1802errorloc <code> <url>
1803errorloc302 <code> <url>
1804 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1805 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1806 yes | yes | yes | yes
1807 Arguments :
1808 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1809 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1810
1811 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1812 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1813 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1814 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1815 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1816
1817 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1818 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1819 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1820
1821 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1822 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1823 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1824 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1825 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1826 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1827 request.
1828
1829 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1830
1831
1832errorloc303 <code> <url>
1833 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1834 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1835 yes | yes | yes | yes
1836 Arguments :
1837 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1838 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1839
1840 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1841 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1842 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1843 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1844 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1845
1846 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1847 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1848 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1849
1850 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1851 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1852 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1853 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001854 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001855
1856 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1857
1858
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01001859force-persist { if | unless } <condition>
1860 Declare a condition to force persistence on down servers
1861 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1862 no | yes | yes | yes
1863
1864 By default, requests are not dispatched to down servers. It is possible to
1865 force this using "option persist", but it is unconditional and redispatches
1866 to a valid server if "option redispatch" is set. That leaves with very little
1867 possibilities to force some requests to reach a server which is artificially
1868 marked down for maintenance operations.
1869
1870 The "force-persist" statement allows one to declare various ACL-based
1871 conditions which, when met, will cause a request to ignore the down status of
1872 a server and still try to connect to it. That makes it possible to start a
1873 server, still replying an error to the health checks, and run a specially
1874 configured browser to test the service. Among the handy methods, one could
1875 use a specific source IP address, or a specific cookie. The cookie also has
1876 the advantage that it can easily be added/removed on the browser from a test
1877 page. Once the service is validated, it is then possible to open the service
1878 to the world by returning a valid response to health checks.
1879
1880 The forced persistence is enabled when an "if" condition is met, or unless an
1881 "unless" condition is met. The final redispatch is always disabled when this
1882 is used.
1883
1884 See also : "option redispatch", "persist", and section 7 about ACL usage.
1885
1886
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001887fullconn <conns>
1888 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1889 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1890 yes | no | yes | yes
1891 Arguments :
1892 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1893 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1894
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001895 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001896 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001897 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001898 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1899 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1900 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1901 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1902 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001903 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001904
1905 Example :
1906 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1907 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1908 # connections.
1909 backend dynamic
1910 fullconn 10000
1911 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1912 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1913
1914 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1915
1916
1917grace <time>
1918 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1919 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Cyril Bonté99ed3272010-01-24 23:29:44 +01001920 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001921 Arguments :
1922 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1923 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1924 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1925
1926 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1927 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001928 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001929 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1930
1931 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1932 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1933 simplify it.
1934
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001935
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001936hash-type <method>
1937 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1938 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1939 yes | no | yes | yes
1940 Arguments :
1941 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1942 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1943 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1944 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1945 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1946 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1947 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1948 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1949 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1950
1951 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1952 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1953 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1954 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1955 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1956 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1957 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1958 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1959 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1960 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1961 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1962 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1963 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1964
1965 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1966
1967 See also : "balance", "server"
1968
1969
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001970http-check disable-on-404
1971 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1972 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001973 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001974 Arguments : none
1975
1976 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1977 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1978 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1979 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1980 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1981 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1982 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1983 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1984 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1985
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001986 See also : "option httpchk"
1987
1988
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01001989http-check send-state
1990 Enable emission of a state header with HTTP health checks
1991 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1992 yes | no | yes | yes
1993 Arguments : none
1994
1995 When this option is set, haproxy will systematically send a special header
1996 "X-Haproxy-Server-State" with a list of parameters indicating to each server
1997 how they are seen by haproxy. This can be used for instance when a server is
1998 manipulated without access to haproxy and the operator needs to know whether
1999 haproxy still sees it up or not, or if the server is the last one in a farm.
2000
2001 The header is composed of fields delimited by semi-colons, the first of which
2002 is a word ("UP", "DOWN", "NOLB"), possibly followed by a number of valid
2003 checks on the total number before transition, just as appears in the stats
2004 interface. Next headers are in the form "<variable>=<value>", indicating in
2005 no specific order some values available in the stats interface :
2006 - a variable "name", containing the name of the backend followed by a slash
2007 ("/") then the name of the server. This can be used when a server is
2008 checked in multiple backends.
2009
2010 - a variable "node" containing the name of the haproxy node, as set in the
2011 global "node" variable, otherwise the system's hostname if unspecified.
2012
2013 - a variable "weight" indicating the weight of the server, a slash ("/")
2014 and the total weight of the farm (just counting usable servers). This
2015 helps to know if other servers are available to handle the load when this
2016 one fails.
2017
2018 - a variable "scur" indicating the current number of concurrent connections
2019 on the server, followed by a slash ("/") then the total number of
2020 connections on all servers of the same backend.
2021
2022 - a variable "qcur" indicating the current number of requests in the
2023 server's queue.
2024
2025 Example of a header received by the application server :
2026 >>> X-Haproxy-Server-State: UP 2/3; name=bck/srv2; node=lb1; weight=1/2; \
2027 scur=13/22; qcur=0
2028
2029 See also : "option httpchk", "http-check disable-on-404"
2030
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002031http-request { allow | deny | http-auth [realm <realm>] }
2032 [ { if | unless } <condition> ]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01002033 Access control for Layer 7 requests
2034
2035 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2036 no | yes | yes | yes
2037
2038 These set of options allow to fine control access to a
2039 frontend/listen/backend. Each option may be followed by if/unless and acl.
2040 First option with matched condition (or option without condition) is final.
2041 For "block" a 403 error will be returned, for "allow" normal processing is
2042 performed, for "http-auth" a 401/407 error code is returned so the client
2043 should be asked to enter a username and password.
2044
2045 There is no fixed limit to the number of http-request statements per
2046 instance.
2047
2048 Example:
2049 acl nagios src 192.168.129.3
2050 acl local_net src 192.168.0.0/16
2051 acl auth_ok http_auth(L1)
2052
2053 http-request allow if nagios
2054 http-request allow if local_net auth_ok
2055 http-request auth realm Gimme if local_net auth_ok
2056 http-request deny
2057
2058 Exampe:
2059 acl auth_ok http_auth_group(L1) G1
2060
2061 http-request auth unless auth_ok
2062
2063 See section 3.4 about userlists and 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreauef781042010-01-27 11:53:01 +01002064
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002065id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02002066 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
2067 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2068 no | yes | yes | yes
2069 Arguments : none
2070
2071 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
2072 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
2073 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01002074
2075
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002076log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002077log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002078 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
2079 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2080 yes | yes | yes | yes
2081 Arguments :
2082 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
2083 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
2084 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
2085 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
2086 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
2087 parameter.
2088
2089 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
2090 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
2091
2092 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
2093 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
2094 standard syslog port).
2095
2096 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
2097 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
2098 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
2099 appropriately writeable).
2100
2101 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
2102
2103 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
2104 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
2105 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
2106
2107 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
2108 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
2109 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002110 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
2111 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
2112 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
2113 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
2114 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002115
2116 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
2117
2118 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
2119 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
2120 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
2121
2122 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002123 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
2124 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
2125 "info".
2126
2127 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
2128 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
2129 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
2130 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
2131
2132 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
2133 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002134
2135 Example :
2136 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02002137 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
2138 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002139
2140
2141maxconn <conns>
2142 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
2143 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2144 yes | yes | yes | no
2145 Arguments :
2146 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
2147 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
2148 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
2149 closes.
2150
2151 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
2152 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
2153 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
2154 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
2155 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
2156 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
2157 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
2158 properly tuned.
2159
2160 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
2161 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
2162 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
2163
2164 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
2165
2166
2167mode { tcp|http|health }
2168 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
2169 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2170 yes | yes | yes | yes
2171 Arguments :
2172 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
2173 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
2174 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
2175 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
2176
2177 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
2178 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
2179 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
2180 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
2181 brings HAProxy most of its value.
2182
2183 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
2184 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
2185 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
2186 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
2187 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
2188 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
2189
2190 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
2191 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
2192 will be refused.
2193
2194 Example :
2195 defaults http_instances
2196 mode http
2197
2198 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
2199
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002200
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002201monitor fail { if | unless } <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002202 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002203 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2204 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002205 Arguments :
2206 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2207 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002208 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002209 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2210 backend and its backup.
2211
2212 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2213 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2214 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2215 servers in a list of backends.
2216
2217 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2218 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2219 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2220 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2221 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2222 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2223 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002224 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002225
2226 Example:
2227 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002228 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002229 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2230 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2231 monitor-uri /site_alive
2232 monitor fail if site_dead
2233
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002234 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2235
2236
2237monitor-net <source>
2238 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2239 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2240 yes | yes | yes | no
2241 Arguments :
2242 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2243 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2244 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2245 followed by a mask.
2246
2247 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2248 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002249 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002250 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2251
2252 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2253 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2254 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2255 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2256 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2257
2258 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2259 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2260 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2261 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2262 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2263
2264 Example :
2265 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2266 frontend www
2267 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2268
2269 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2270
2271
2272monitor-uri <uri>
2273 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2274 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2275 yes | yes | yes | no
2276 Arguments :
2277 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2278 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2279
2280 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2281 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2282 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2283 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2284 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2285 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2286 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2287 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2288
2289 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2290 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2291 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2292 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2293 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2294 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2295
2296 Example :
2297 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2298 frontend www
2299 mode http
2300 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2301
2302 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2303
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002304
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002305option abortonclose
2306no option abortonclose
2307 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2308 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2309 yes | no | yes | yes
2310 Arguments : none
2311
2312 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2313 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2314 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2315 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002316 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002317 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2318 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2319 encountered while delivering the response.
2320
2321 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2322 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2323 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2324 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2325 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2326 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002327 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002328 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002329 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002330 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2331 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2332 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2333
2334 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2335 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2336 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2337 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2338 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2339 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2340 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2341 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002342 reduces the response time for other users.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002343
2344 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2345 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2346
2347 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2348
2349
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002350option accept-invalid-http-request
2351no option accept-invalid-http-request
2352 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2353 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2354 yes | yes | yes | no
2355 Arguments : none
2356
2357 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2358 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2359 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2360 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2361 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2362 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2363 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2364 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2365 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2366
2367 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2368 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2369 been confirmed.
2370
2371 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2372 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2373 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2374 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2375
2376 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2377 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2378
2379 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2380 stats socket.
2381
2382
2383option accept-invalid-http-response
2384no option accept-invalid-http-response
2385 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2386 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2387 yes | no | yes | yes
2388 Arguments : none
2389
2390 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2391 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2392 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2393 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2394 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2395 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2396 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2397 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2398 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2399
2400 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2401 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2402 been confirmed.
2403
2404 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2405 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2406 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2407 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2408
2409 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2410 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2411
2412 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2413 stats socket.
2414
2415
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002416option allbackups
2417no option allbackups
2418 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2419 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2420 yes | no | yes | yes
2421 Arguments : none
2422
2423 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2424 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2425 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2426 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2427 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2428 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2429 order between the backup servers anymore.
2430
2431 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2432 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2433
2434 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2435 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2436
2437
2438option checkcache
2439no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002440 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002441 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2442 yes | no | yes | yes
2443 Arguments : none
2444
2445 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2446 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002447 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002448 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2449 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2450 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2451
2452 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002453 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002454 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002455 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2456 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002457 to the client are :
2458 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002459 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002460 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002461 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2462 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2463 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2464 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2465 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2466 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2467 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2468 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2469 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2470 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2471 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2472
2473 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002474 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002475 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002476 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002477 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2478
2479 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2480 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002481 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002482 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2483
2484 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2485 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2486
2487
2488option clitcpka
2489no option clitcpka
2490 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2491 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2492 yes | yes | yes | no
2493 Arguments : none
2494
2495 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2496 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2497 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2498 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2499
2500 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2501 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2502 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2503 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2504
2505 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2506 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2507 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2508 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2509 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2510
2511 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2512
2513 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2514 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2515 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2516
2517 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2518 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2519
2520 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2521
2522
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002523option contstats
2524 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2525 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2526 yes | yes | yes | no
2527 Arguments : none
2528
2529 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2530 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2531 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2532 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2533 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2534 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2535 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2536
2537
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002538option dontlog-normal
2539no option dontlog-normal
2540 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2541 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2542 yes | yes | yes | no
2543 Arguments : none
2544
2545 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2546 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2547 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2548 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2549 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2550 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2551 logged.
2552
2553 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2554 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2555 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2556
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002557 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002558 logging.
2559
2560
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002561option dontlognull
2562no option dontlognull
2563 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2564 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2565 yes | yes | yes | no
2566 Arguments : none
2567
2568 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2569 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2570 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2571 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2572 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2573 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2574 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2575
2576 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2577 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2578 would not be logged.
2579
2580 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2581 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2582
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002583 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002584
2585
2586option forceclose
2587no option forceclose
2588 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2589 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaua31e5df2009-12-30 01:10:35 +01002590 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002591 Arguments : none
2592
2593 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2594 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2595 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2596 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2597 global session times in the logs.
2598
2599 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
Willy Tarreau82eeaf22009-12-29 12:09:05 +01002600 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server has finished
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002601 to respond. This option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option. Note that
2602 this option also enables the parsing of the full request and response, which
2603 means we can close the connection to the server very quickly, releasing some
2604 resources earlier than with httpclose.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002605
2606 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2607 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2608
2609 See also : "option httpclose"
2610
2611
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002612option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002613 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2614 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2615 yes | yes | yes | yes
2616 Arguments :
2617 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2618 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002619 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002620 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002621
2622 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2623 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2624 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2625 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2626 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2627 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2628 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002629 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2630 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2631 possible that the client has already brought one.
2632
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002633 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002634 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01002635 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2636 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002637 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2638 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002639
2640 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2641 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2642 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2643 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2644 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2645 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2646 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2647
2648 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002649 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2650 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2651 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002652
2653 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2654 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2655 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2656 when using this option.
2657
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002658 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002659 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2660 frontend www
2661 mode http
2662 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2663
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002664 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2665 backend www
2666 mode http
2667 option forwardfor header X-Client
2668
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002669 See also : "option httpclose"
2670
2671
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002672option httpchk
2673option httpchk <uri>
2674option httpchk <method> <uri>
2675option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2676 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2677 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2678 yes | no | yes | yes
2679 Arguments :
2680 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2681 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2682 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2683 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2684 ones.
2685
2686 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2687 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2688 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2689
2690 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2691 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2692 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2693 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2694 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2695
2696 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2697 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2698 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2699 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2700 the lack of any response.
2701
2702 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2703
2704 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2705 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2706 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2707
2708 Examples :
2709 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2710 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2711 backend https_relay
2712 mode tcp
Willy Tarreauebaf21a2008-03-21 20:17:14 +01002713 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002714 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2715
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002716 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "option mysql-check",
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002717 "http-check" and the "check", "port" and "inter" server options.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002718
2719
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002720option http-server-close
2721no option http-server-close
2722 Enable or disable HTTP connection closing on the server side
2723 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2724 yes | yes | yes | yes
2725 Arguments : none
2726
2727 This mode enables HTTP connection-close mode on the server side while keeping
2728 the ability to support HTTP keep-alive and pipelining on the client side.
2729 This provides the lowest latency on the client side (slow network) and the
2730 fastest session reuse on the server side to save server resources, similarly
2731 to "option forceclose". It also permits non-keepalive capable servers to be
2732 served in keep-alive mode to the clients if they conform to the requirements
2733 of RFC2616.
2734
2735 At the moment, logs will not indicate whether requests came from the same
2736 session or not. The accept date reported in the logs corresponds to the end
2737 of the previous request, and the request time corresponds to the time spent
2738 waiting for a new request. The keep-alive request time is still bound to the
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01002739 timeout defined by "timeout http-keep-alive" or "timeout http-request" if
2740 not set.
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002741
2742 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2743 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002744 It is worth noting that "option forceclose" has precedence over "option
2745 http-server-close" and that combining "http-server-close" with "httpclose"
2746 basically achieve the same result as "forceclose".
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002747
2748 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2749 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2750
2751 See also : "option forceclose" and "option httpclose"
2752
2753
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002754option http-use-proxy-header
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01002755no option http-use-proxy-header
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002756 Make use of non-standard Proxy-Connection header instead of Connection
2757 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2758 yes | yes | yes | no
2759 Arguments : none
2760
2761 While RFC2616 explicitly states that HTTP/1.1 agents must use the
2762 Connection header to indicate their wish of persistent or non-persistent
2763 connections, both browsers and proxies ignore this header for proxied
2764 connections and make use of the undocumented, non-standard Proxy-Connection
2765 header instead. The issue begins when trying to put a load balancer between
2766 browsers and such proxies, because there will be a difference between what
2767 haproxy understands and what the client and the proxy agree on.
2768
2769 By setting this option in a frontend, haproxy can automatically switch to use
2770 that non-standard header if it sees proxied requests. A proxied request is
2771 defined here as one where the URI begins with neither a '/' nor a '*'. The
2772 choice of header only affects requests passing through proxies making use of
2773 one of the "httpclose", "forceclose" and "http-server-close" options. Note
2774 that this option can only be specified in a frontend and will affect the
2775 request along its whole life.
2776
Willy Tarreau844a7e72010-01-31 21:46:18 +01002777 Also, when this option is set, a request which requires authentication will
2778 automatically switch to use proxy authentication headers if it is itself a
2779 proxied request. That makes it possible to check or enforce authentication in
2780 front of an existing proxy.
2781
Willy Tarreau88d349d2010-01-25 12:15:43 +01002782 This option should normally never be used, except in front of a proxy.
2783
2784 See also : "option httpclose", "option forceclose" and "option
2785 http-server-close".
2786
2787
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002788option httpclose
2789no option httpclose
2790 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2791 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2792 yes | yes | yes | yes
2793 Arguments : none
2794
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002795 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002796 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2797 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2798 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2799 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2800 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2801 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2802 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2803 be removed.
2804
2805 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002806 close the connection eventhough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2807 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this happens
2808 it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes the
2809 request connection once the server responds. Option "forceclose" also
2810 releases the server connection earlier because it does not have to wait for
2811 the client to acknowledge it.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002812
2813 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2814 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2815 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
Willy Tarreau0dfdf192010-01-05 11:33:11 +01002816 If "option http-server-close" is enabled at the same time as "httpclose", it
2817 basically achieves the same result as "option forceclose".
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002818
2819 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2820 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2821
Willy Tarreaub608feb2010-01-02 22:47:18 +01002822 See also : "option forceclose" and "option http-server-close"
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002823
2824
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002825option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002826 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2827 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2828 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002829 Arguments :
2830 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2831 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2832 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2833 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2834 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002835
2836 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2837 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2838 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2839 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2840 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2841 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2842 ports.
2843
2844 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2845
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002846 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2847 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2848 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2849 by default.
2850
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002851 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002852
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002853
2854option http_proxy
2855no option http_proxy
2856 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2857 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2858 yes | yes | yes | yes
2859 Arguments : none
2860
2861 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2862 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2863 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2864 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2865 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2866
2867 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2868 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2869 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2870 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2871 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2872 be analyzed.
2873
2874 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2875 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2876
2877 Example :
2878 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2879 backend direct_forward
2880 option httpclose
2881 option http_proxy
2882
2883 See also : "option httpclose"
2884
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002885
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002886option independant-streams
2887no option independant-streams
2888 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2889 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2890 yes | yes | yes | yes
2891 Arguments : none
2892
2893 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2894 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2895 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2896 receive data or not.
2897
2898 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2899 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2900 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2901 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2902 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2903 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2904 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2905 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2906 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2907 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2908 socket buffers.
2909
2910 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2911 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2912 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2913 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2914 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2915
2916 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2917
2918
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002919option log-health-checks
2920no option log-health-checks
2921 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2922 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2923 yes | no | yes | yes
2924 Arguments : none
2925
2926 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2927 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2928 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2929 of additional information is limited.
2930
2931 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2932 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2933
2934 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2935
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002936
2937option log-separate-errors
2938no option log-separate-errors
2939 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2940 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2941 yes | yes | yes | no
2942 Arguments : none
2943
2944 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2945 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2946 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2947 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2948 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2949 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2950 provides very important information.
2951
2952 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2953 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2954 error logs.
2955
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002956 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002957 logging.
2958
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002959
2960option logasap
2961no option logasap
2962 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2963 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2964 yes | yes | yes | no
2965 Arguments : none
2966
2967 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2968 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2969 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2970 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2971 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2972 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2973 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002974 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002975 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2976 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2977
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002978 Examples :
2979 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2980 mode http
2981 option httplog
2982 option logasap
2983 log 192.168.2.200 local3
2984
2985 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
2986 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
2987 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
2988 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
2989
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002990 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002991 logging.
2992
2993
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01002994option mysql-check
2995 Use Mysql health checks for server testing
2996 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2997 yes | no | yes | yes
2998 Arguments : none
2999
3000 The check consists in parsing Mysql Handshake Initialisation packet or Error
3001 packet, which is sent by MySQL server on connect. It is a basic but useful
3002 test which does not produce any logging on the server. However, it does not
3003 check database presence nor database consistency, nor user permission to
3004 access. To do this, you can use an external check with xinetd for example.
3005
3006 Most often, an incoming MySQL server needs to see the client's IP address for
3007 various purposes, including IP privilege matching and connection logging.
3008 When possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3009 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3010 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in, and the MySQL server
3011 to route the client via the machine hosting haproxy.
3012
3013 See also: "option httpchk"
3014
3015
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003016option nolinger
3017no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003018 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003019 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3020 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003021 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003022
3023 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
3024 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
3025 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
3026 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
3027 connections.
3028
3029 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
3030 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
3031 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
3032 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
3033 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
3034 this too.
3035
3036 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
3037 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
3038 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
3039
3040 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
3041 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
3042 for servers.
3043
3044 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3045 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3046
3047
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02003048option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
3049 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
3050 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3051 yes | yes | yes | yes
3052 Arguments :
3053 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
3054 matching <network>
3055 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
3056 header name.
3057
3058 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
3059 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
3060 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
3061 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
3062 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
3063 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
3064 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
3065 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
3066 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
3067 possible that the client has already brought one.
3068
3069 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
3070 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
3071 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
3072 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
3073 header and requires different one.
3074
3075 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
3076 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
3077 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
3078 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
3079 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
3080 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
3081 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
3082
3083 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
3084 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
3085 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
3086 both are defined.
3087
3088 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
3089 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
3090 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
3091 when using this option.
3092
3093 Examples :
3094 # Original Destination address
3095 frontend www
3096 mode http
3097 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
3098
3099 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
3100 backend www
3101 mode http
3102 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
3103
3104 See also : "option httpclose"
3105
3106
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003107option persist
3108no option persist
3109 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
3110 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3111 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003112 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003113
3114 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
3115 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
3116 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
3117 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
3118 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
3119 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
3120 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
3121 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
3122 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
3123 redirected to another valid server.
3124
3125 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3126 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3127
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003128 See also : "option redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003129
3130
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003131option redispatch
3132no option redispatch
3133 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3134 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3135 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003136 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003137
3138 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3139 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3140 be able to access the service anymore.
3141
3142 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
3143 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
3144
3145 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3146 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3147 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003148
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003149 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
3150 "redisp" keywords.
3151
3152 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3153 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3154
Willy Tarreau4de91492010-01-22 19:10:05 +01003155 See also : "redispatch", "retries", "force-persist"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003156
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003157
3158option smtpchk
3159option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
3160 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
3161 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3162 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003163 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003164 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
3165 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
3166 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
3167
3168 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
3169 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
3170 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
3171
3172 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
3173 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
3174 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
3175 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
3176 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
3177 dead server.
3178
3179 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
3180 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
3181 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
3182 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
3183
3184 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
3185 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
3186 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
3187 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
3188 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
3189
3190 Example :
3191 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
3192
3193 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
3194
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003195
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02003196option socket-stats
3197no option socket-stats
3198
3199 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
3200 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3201 yes | yes | yes | no
3202
3203 Arguments : none
3204
3205
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003206option splice-auto
3207no option splice-auto
3208 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
3209 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3210 yes | yes | yes | yes
3211 Arguments : none
3212
3213 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3214 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
3215 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
3216 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003217 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01003218 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
3219 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
3220 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
3221 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3222
3223 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
3224 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
3225 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
3226 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
3227 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
3228 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
3229 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
3230 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
3231 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
3232 keyword.
3233
3234 Example :
3235 option splice-auto
3236
3237 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3238 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3239
3240 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
3241 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3242
3243
3244option splice-request
3245no option splice-request
3246 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
3247 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3248 yes | yes | yes | yes
3249 Arguments : none
3250
3251 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3252 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3253 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3254 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3255 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3256 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3257
3258 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3259
3260 Example :
3261 option splice-request
3262
3263 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3264 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3265
3266 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
3267 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3268
3269
3270option splice-response
3271no option splice-response
3272 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
3273 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3274 yes | yes | yes | yes
3275 Arguments : none
3276
3277 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
3278 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
3279 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
3280 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
3281 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
3282 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
3283
3284 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
3285
3286 Example :
3287 option splice-response
3288
3289 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3290 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3291
3292 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
3293 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
3294
3295
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003296option srvtcpka
3297no option srvtcpka
3298 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3299 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3300 yes | no | yes | yes
3301 Arguments : none
3302
3303 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3304 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3305 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3306 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3307
3308 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3309 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3310 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3311 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3312
3313 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3314 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3315 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3316 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3317 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3318
3319 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3320
3321 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3322 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3323 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3324
3325 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3326 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3327
3328 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3329
3330
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003331option ssl-hello-chk
3332 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3333 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3334 yes | no | yes | yes
3335 Arguments : none
3336
3337 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3338 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3339 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3340 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3341 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3342 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3343 hello message.
3344
3345 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3346 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3347 messages, which is appreciable.
3348
3349 See also: "option httpchk"
3350
3351
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003352option tcp-smart-accept
3353no option tcp-smart-accept
3354 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3355 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3356 yes | yes | yes | no
3357 Arguments : none
3358
3359 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3360 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3361 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3362 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3363 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3364 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3365
3366 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3367 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3368 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3369 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3370
3371 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3372 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3373 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3374 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3375
3376 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3377 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3378 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3379
3380 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3381 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3382 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3383
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003384 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3385
3386
3387option tcp-smart-connect
3388no option tcp-smart-connect
3389 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3390 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3391 yes | no | yes | yes
3392 Arguments : none
3393
3394 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3395 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3396 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3397 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3398 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3399
3400 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3401 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3402 complex.
3403
3404 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3405 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3406 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3407
3408 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3409 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3410
3411 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3412
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003413
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003414option tcpka
3415 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3416 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3417 yes | yes | yes | yes
3418 Arguments : none
3419
3420 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3421 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3422 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3423 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3424
3425 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3426 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3427 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3428 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3429
3430 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3431 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3432 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3433 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3434 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3435
3436 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3437
3438 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3439 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3440 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3441 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3442 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3443 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3444 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3445 backends.
3446
3447 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3448
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003449
3450option tcplog
3451 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3452 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3453 yes | yes | yes | yes
3454 Arguments : none
3455
3456 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3457 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3458 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3459 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3460 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3461 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3462 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3463 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3464
3465 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3466
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003467 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003468
3469
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003470option transparent
3471no option transparent
3472 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3473 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003474 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003475 Arguments : none
3476
3477 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3478 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3479 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3480 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3481 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3482 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3483 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3484 appropriate server.
3485
3486 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3487 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3488
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003489 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3490 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003491
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003492
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003493persist rdp-cookie
3494persist rdp-cookie(name)
3495 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3496 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3497 yes | no | yes | yes
3498 Arguments :
3499 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3500 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3501 no valid reason to change this name.
3502
3503 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3504 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3505 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3506 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3507 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3508 forwarded to this server.
3509
3510 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3511 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3512 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003513 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003514 a single "listen" section.
3515
3516 Example :
3517 listen tse-farm
3518 bind :3389
3519 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3520 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3521 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3522 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3523 persist rdp-cookie
3524 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3525 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3526 balance rdp-cookie
3527 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3528 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3529
3530 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3531
3532
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003533rate-limit sessions <rate>
3534 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3535 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3536 yes | yes | yes | no
3537 Arguments :
3538 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3539 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3540
3541 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3542 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3543 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3544 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3545 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3546 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3547
3548 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3549 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3550 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3551 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3552
3553 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3554 listen smtp
3555 mode tcp
3556 bind :25
3557 rate-limit sessions 10
3558 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3559
3560 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3561 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3562
3563 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3564
3565
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003566redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
3567redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> [{if | unless} <condition>]
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003568 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3569 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3570 no | yes | yes | yes
3571
3572 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreauf285f542010-01-03 20:03:03 +01003573 response. If no condition is specified, the redirect applies unconditionally.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003574
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003575 Arguments :
3576 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3577 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3578 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3579 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003580 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3581 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3582 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3583 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003584
3585 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3586 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3587 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3588 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3589 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3590 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3591 location with a GET method.
3592
3593 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3594 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3595
3596 - "drop-query"
3597 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3598 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3599 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3600 with a location-type redirect.
3601
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003602 - "append-slash"
3603 This keyword may be used in conjunction with "drop-query" to redirect
3604 users who use a URL not ending with a '/' to the same one with the '/'.
3605 It can be useful to ensure that search engines will only see one URL.
3606 For this, a return code 301 is preferred.
3607
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003608 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3609 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3610 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3611 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3612 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3613 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3614 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3615
3616 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3617 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3618 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3619 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3620 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3621 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3622 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003623
3624 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3625 acl clear dst_port 80
3626 acl secure dst_port 8080
3627 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003628 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003629 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003630 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3631
3632 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003633 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3634 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3635 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003636 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003637
Willy Tarreau81e3b4f2010-01-10 00:42:19 +01003638 Example: send redirects for request for articles without a '/'.
3639 acl missing_slash path_reg ^/article/[^/]*$
3640 redirect code 301 prefix / drop-query append-slash if missing_slash
3641
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003642 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003643
3644
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003645redisp (deprecated)
3646redispatch (deprecated)
3647 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3648 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3649 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003650 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003651
3652 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3653 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3654 be able to access the service anymore.
3655
3656 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3657 redistribute them to a working server.
3658
3659 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3660 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3661 value.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003662
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003663 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3664 "option redispatch" instead.
3665
3666 See also : "option redispatch"
3667
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003668
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003669reqadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003670 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3671 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3672 no | yes | yes | yes
3673 Arguments :
3674 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3675 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003676 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003677
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003678 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3679 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3680
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003681 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3682 the last header of an HTTP request.
3683
3684 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3685 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3686 responses.
3687
Willy Tarreau8abd4cd2010-01-31 14:30:44 +01003688 Example : add "X-Proto: SSL" to requests coming via port 81
3689 acl is-ssl dst_port 81
3690 reqadd X-Proto:\ SSL if is-ssl
3691
3692 See also: "rspadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3693 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003694
3695
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003696reqallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3697reqiallow <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003698 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3699 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3700 no | yes | yes | yes
3701 Arguments :
3702 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3703 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3704 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3705 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3706 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3707 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3708 ignores case.
3709
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003710 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3711 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3712
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003713 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3714 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3715 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3716 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003717 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003718
3719 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3720 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3721
3722 Example :
3723 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3724 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3725 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3726
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003727 See also: "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and
3728 section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003729
3730
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003731reqdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3732reqidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003733 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3734 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3735 no | yes | yes | yes
3736 Arguments :
3737 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3738 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3739 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3740 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3741 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3742 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3743
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003744 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3745 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3746
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003747 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3748 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3749 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3750 next servers.
3751
3752 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3753 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3754 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3755
3756 Example :
3757 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3758 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3759 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3760
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003761 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel", section 6 about HTTP header
3762 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003763
3764
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003765reqdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3766reqideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003767 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3768 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3769 no | yes | yes | yes
3770 Arguments :
3771 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3772 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3773 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3774 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3775 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3776 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3777 case.
3778
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003779 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3780 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3781
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003782 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3783 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3784 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3785 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003786 header names are not.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003787
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003788 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003789 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01003790 using ACLs.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003791
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003792 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3793 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3794
3795 Example :
3796 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3797 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3798 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3799
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003800 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3801 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003802
3803
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003804reqpass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3805reqipass <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003806 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3807 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3808 no | yes | yes | yes
3809 Arguments :
3810 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3811 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3812 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3813 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3814 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3815 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3816 case.
3817
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003818 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3819 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3820
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003821 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3822 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3823 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3824 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3825
3826 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3827 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3828
3829 Example :
3830 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3831 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3832 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3833 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3834
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003835 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "block", section 6 about HTTP header
3836 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003837
3838
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003839reqrep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3840reqirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003841 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3842 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3843 no | yes | yes | yes
3844 Arguments :
3845 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3846 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3847 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3848 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3849 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3850 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3851
3852 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3853 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3854 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3855 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003856 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003857
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003858 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3859 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3860
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003861 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3862 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3863 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3864
3865 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3866 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3867 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3868 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3869 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3870
3871 Example :
3872 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3873 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3874 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3875 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3876
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003877 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep", section 6 about HTTP header
3878 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003879
3880
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003881reqtarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3882reqitarpit <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003883 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3884 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3885 no | yes | yes | yes
3886 Arguments :
3887 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3888 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3889 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3890 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3891 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3892 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3893 ignores case.
3894
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003895 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3896 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3897
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003898 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3899 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003900 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3901 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3902 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003903 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3904 not set.
3905
3906 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3907 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3908 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3909 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3910 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3911
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003912 Examples :
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003913 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3914 # block all others.
3915 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3916 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3917
Willy Tarreau5321c422010-01-28 20:35:13 +01003918 # block bad guys
3919 acl badguys src 10.1.0.3 172.16.13.20/28
3920 reqitarpit . if badguys
3921
3922 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", section 6 about HTTP header
3923 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003924
3925
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003926retries <value>
3927 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3928 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3929 yes | no | yes | yes
3930 Arguments :
3931 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3932 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3933 default value is 3.
3934
3935 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3936 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3937 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3938
3939 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3940 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3941
3942 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3943 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3944
3945 See also : "option redispatch"
3946
3947
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003948rspadd <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003949 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3950 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3951 no | yes | yes | yes
3952 Arguments :
3953 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3954 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003955 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003956
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003957 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3958 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3959
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003960 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3961 the last header of an HTTP response.
3962
3963 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3964 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3965 responses.
3966
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003967 See also: "reqadd", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation, and section 7
3968 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003969
3970
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003971rspdel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
3972rspidel <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003973 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3974 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3975 no | yes | yes | yes
3976 Arguments :
3977 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3978 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3979 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3980 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3981 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3982 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3983 ignores case.
3984
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01003985 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
3986 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
3987
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003988 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
3989 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3990 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
3991 client.
3992
3993 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3994 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3995 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3996
3997 Example :
3998 # remove the Server header from responses
3999 reqidel ^Server:.*
4000
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004001 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel", section 6 about HTTP header
4002 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004003
4004
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004005rspdeny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4006rspideny <search> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004007 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
4008 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4009 no | yes | yes | yes
4010 Arguments :
4011 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4012 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4013 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4014 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4015 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4016 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
4017 ignores case.
4018
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004019 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4020 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4021
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004022 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
4023 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
4024 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
4025 case-sensitive.
4026
4027 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01004028 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
4029 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
4030 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004031
4032 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
4033 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
4034
4035 Example :
4036 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
4037 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
4038
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004039 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block", section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
4040 and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004041
4042
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004043rsprep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>]
4044rspirep <search> <string> [{if | unless} <cond>] (ignore case)
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004045 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
4046 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4047 no | yes | yes | yes
4048 Arguments :
4049 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
4050 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
4051 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
4052 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
4053 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
4054 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
4055 ignores case.
4056
4057 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
4058 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
4059 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
4060 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004061 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004062
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004063 <cond> is an optional matching condition built from ACLs. It makes it
4064 possible to ignore this rule when other conditions are not met.
4065
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004066 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
4067 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
4068 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
4069
4070 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
4071 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
4072 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
4073 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
4074 are not case-sensitive.
4075
4076 Example :
4077 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
4078 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
4079
Willy Tarreaufdb563c2010-01-31 15:43:27 +01004080 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep", section 6 about HTTP header
4081 manipulation, and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01004082
4083
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004084server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
4085 Declare a server in a backend
4086 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4087 no | no | yes | yes
4088 Arguments :
4089 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
4090 appear in logs and alerts.
4091
4092 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
4093 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
4094 start-up.
4095
4096 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
4097 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
4098 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
4099 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
4100 adding this value to the client's port.
4101
4102 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
4103 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004104 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004105
4106 Examples :
4107 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
4108 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
4109
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01004110 See also: "default-server" and section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004111
4112
4113source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004114source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004115 Set the source address for outgoing connections
4116 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4117 yes | no | yes | yes
4118 Arguments :
4119 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
4120 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
4121 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
4122 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
4123
4124 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
4125 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004126 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
4127 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
4128 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004129
4130 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
4131 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
4132 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
4133 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
4134 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
4135 <addr>.
4136
4137 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
4138 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
4139 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
4140 port.
4141
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01004142 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
4143 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
4144 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
4145 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
4146 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
4147 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
4148
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004149 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
4150 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
4151 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
4152 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
4153
4154 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
4155 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
4156 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
4157 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
4158 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
4159 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
4160
4161 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
4162 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
4163 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
4164 there are two methods :
4165
4166 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
4167 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
4168 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
4169 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
4170 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
4171 of the client ranges may be used.
4172
4173 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
4174 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
4175 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
4176 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
4177 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
4178 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
4179 same session.
4180
4181 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
4182 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
4183 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
4184 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
4185 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
4186 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
4187
4188 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
4189 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
4190 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004191 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004192
4193 Examples :
4194 backend private
4195 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
4196 source 192.168.1.200
4197
4198 backend transparent_ssl1
4199 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
4200 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4201
4202 backend transparent_ssl2
4203 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
4204 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
4205 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
4206
4207 backend transparent_ssl3
4208 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
4209 # is more conntrack-friendly.
4210 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
4211
4212 backend transparent_smtp
4213 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
4214 # with Tproxy version 4.
4215 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
4216
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004217 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004218 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
4219
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01004220
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004221srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4222 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4223 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4224 yes | no | yes | yes
4225 Arguments :
4226 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4227 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4228 as explained at the top of this document.
4229
4230 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4231 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4232 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4233 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4234 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4235 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4236 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4237
4238 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4239 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4240 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4241 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4242 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004243 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004244 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004245 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004246
4247 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4248 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4249 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4250 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4251 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4252 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4253
4254 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
4255 Please use "timeout server" instead.
4256
4257 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
4258
4259
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004260stats auth <user>:<passwd>
4261 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
4262 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4263 yes | no | yes | yes
4264 Arguments :
4265 <user> is a user name to grant access to
4266
4267 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
4268
4269 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
4270 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
4271 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
4272 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
4273 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
4274 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
4275
4276 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
4277 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
4278 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
4279 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
4280
4281 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
4282 report using "stats scope".
4283
4284 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4285 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4286 unobvious parameters.
4287
4288 Example :
4289 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4290 backend public_www
4291 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4292 stats enable
4293 stats hide-version
4294 stats scope .
4295 stats uri /admin?stats
4296 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4297 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4298 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4299
4300 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4301 backend private_monitoring
4302 stats enable
4303 stats uri /admin?stats
4304 stats refresh 5s
4305
4306 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
4307
4308
4309stats enable
4310 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
4311 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4312 yes | no | yes | yes
4313 Arguments : none
4314
4315 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
4316 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
4317 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
4318 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
4319 - stats auth : no authentication
4320 - stats scope : no restriction
4321
4322 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4323 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4324 unobvious parameters.
4325
4326 Example :
4327 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4328 backend public_www
4329 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4330 stats enable
4331 stats hide-version
4332 stats scope .
4333 stats uri /admin?stats
4334 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4335 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4336 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4337
4338 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4339 backend private_monitoring
4340 stats enable
4341 stats uri /admin?stats
4342 stats refresh 5s
4343
4344 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4345
4346
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004347stats show-node [ <name> ]
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004348 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
4349 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4350 yes | no | yes | yes
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004351 Arguments:
4352 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4353 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004354
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004355 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4356 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4357 provided for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004358
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004359 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4360 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4361 unobvious parameters.
4362
4363 Example:
4364 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4365 backend private_monitoring
4366 stats enable
4367 stats show-node Europe-1
4368 stats uri /admin?stats
4369 stats refresh 5s
4370
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004371 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global
4372 section.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004373
4374
4375stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4376 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4377 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4378 yes | no | yes | yes
4379
4380 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4381 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4382
4383 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4384 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004385
4386 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4387 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4388 unobvious parameters.
4389
4390 Example :
4391 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4392 backend private_monitoring
4393 stats enable
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004394 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004395 stats uri /admin?stats
4396 stats refresh 5s
4397
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004398 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in
4399 global section.
4400
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004401
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki15514c22010-01-04 16:03:09 +01004402stats show-legends
4403 Enable reporting additional informations on the statistics page :
4404 - cap: capabilities (proxy)
4405 - mode: one of tcp, http or health (proxy)
4406 - id: SNMP ID (proxy, socket, server)
4407 - IP (socket, server)
4408 - cookie (backend, server)
4409
4410 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4411 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4412 unobvious parameters.
4413
4414 See also: "stats enable", "stats uri".
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004415
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01004416
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004417stats realm <realm>
4418 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4419 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4420 yes | no | yes | yes
4421 Arguments :
4422 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4423 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4424 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4425
4426 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4427 using a backslash ('\').
4428
4429 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4430 only related to authentication.
4431
4432 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4433 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4434 unobvious parameters.
4435
4436 Example :
4437 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4438 backend public_www
4439 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4440 stats enable
4441 stats hide-version
4442 stats scope .
4443 stats uri /admin?stats
4444 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4445 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4446 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4447
4448 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4449 backend private_monitoring
4450 stats enable
4451 stats uri /admin?stats
4452 stats refresh 5s
4453
4454 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4455
4456
4457stats refresh <delay>
4458 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4459 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4460 yes | no | yes | yes
4461 Arguments :
4462 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4463 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4464 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4465 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4466 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4467 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4468
4469 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4470 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4471 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4472 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4473
4474 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4475 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4476 unobvious parameters.
4477
4478 Example :
4479 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4480 backend public_www
4481 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4482 stats enable
4483 stats hide-version
4484 stats scope .
4485 stats uri /admin?stats
4486 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4487 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4488 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4489
4490 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4491 backend private_monitoring
4492 stats enable
4493 stats uri /admin?stats
4494 stats refresh 5s
4495
4496 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4497
4498
4499stats scope { <name> | "." }
4500 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4501 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4502 yes | no | yes | yes
4503 Arguments :
4504 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4505 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4506 section in which the statement appears.
4507
4508 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4509 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4510 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4511 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4512 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4513 exists.
4514
4515 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4516 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4517 unobvious parameters.
4518
4519 Example :
4520 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4521 backend public_www
4522 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4523 stats enable
4524 stats hide-version
4525 stats scope .
4526 stats uri /admin?stats
4527 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4528 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4529 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4530
4531 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4532 backend private_monitoring
4533 stats enable
4534 stats uri /admin?stats
4535 stats refresh 5s
4536
4537 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4538
4539
4540stats uri <prefix>
4541 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4542 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4543 yes | no | yes | yes
4544 Arguments :
4545 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4546 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4547 query string.
4548
4549 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4550 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4551 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4552 possible to reach it in the application.
4553
4554 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004555 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004556 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4557 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4558 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4559 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4560
4561 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4562 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4563 an address or a port to statistics only.
4564
4565 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4566 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4567 unobvious parameters.
4568
4569 Example :
4570 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4571 backend public_www
4572 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4573 stats enable
4574 stats hide-version
4575 stats scope .
4576 stats uri /admin?stats
4577 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4578 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4579 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4580
4581 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4582 backend private_monitoring
4583 stats enable
4584 stats uri /admin?stats
4585 stats refresh 5s
4586
4587 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4588
4589
4590stats hide-version
4591 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
4592 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4593 yes | no | yes | yes
4594 Arguments : none
4595
4596 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4597 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4598 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4599 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4600 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4601 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
4602
4603 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4604 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4605 unobvious parameters.
4606
4607 Example :
4608 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4609 backend public_www
4610 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4611 stats enable
4612 stats hide-version
4613 stats scope .
4614 stats uri /admin?stats
4615 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4616 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4617 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4618
4619 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4620 backend private_monitoring
4621 stats enable
4622 stats uri /admin?stats
4623 stats refresh 5s
4624
4625 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4626
4627
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01004628stick match <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <cond>]
4629 Define a request pattern matching condition to stick a user to a server
4630 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4631 no | no | yes | yes
4632
4633 Arguments :
4634 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4635 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4636 will be analysed in the hope to find a matching entry in a
4637 stickiness table. This rule is mandatory.
4638
4639 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4640 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4641 the "stick-table" statement.
4642
4643 <cond> is an optional matching condition. It makes it possible to match
4644 on a certain criterion only when other conditions are met (or
4645 not met). For instance, it could be used to match on a source IP
4646 address except when a request passes through a known proxy, in
4647 which case we'd match on a header containing that IP address.
4648
4649 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4650 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick match" statement
4651 describes a rule to extract the stickiness criterion from an incoming request
4652 or connection. See section 7 for a complete list of possible patterns and
4653 transformation rules.
4654
4655 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4656 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4657 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4658 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4659 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4660 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4661 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4662
4663 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick match" statement
4664 will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. See section 7 for
4665 ACL based conditions.
4666
4667 There is no limit on the number of "stick match" statements. The first that
4668 applies and matches will cause the request to be directed to the same server
4669 as was used for the request which created the entry. That way, multiple
4670 matches can be used as fallbacks.
4671
4672 The stick rules are checked after the persistence cookies, so they will not
4673 affect stickiness if a cookie has already been used to select a server. That
4674 way, it becomes very easy to insert cookies and match on IP addresses in
4675 order to maintain stickiness between HTTP and HTTPS.
4676
4677 Example :
4678 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4679 # last 30 minutes
4680 backend pop
4681 mode tcp
4682 balance roundrobin
4683 stick store-request src
4684 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4685 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4686 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4687
4688 backend smtp
4689 mode tcp
4690 balance roundrobin
4691 stick match src table pop
4692 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4693 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4694
4695 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4696 extraction.
4697
4698
4699stick on <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4700 Define a request pattern to associate a user to a server
4701 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4702 no | no | yes | yes
4703
4704 Note : This form is exactly equivalent to "stick match" followed by
4705 "stick store-request", all with the same arguments. Please refer
4706 to both keywords for details. It is only provided as a convenience
4707 for writing more maintainable configurations.
4708
4709 Examples :
4710 # The following form ...
4711 stick or src table pop if !localhost
4712
4713 # ...is strictly equivalent to this one :
4714 stick match src table pop if !localhost
4715 stick store-request src table pop if !localhost
4716
4717
4718 # Use cookie persistence for HTTP, and stick on source address for HTTPS as
4719 # well as HTTP without cookie. Share the same table between both accesses.
4720 backend http
4721 mode http
4722 balance roundrobin
4723 stick on src table https
4724 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
4725 server s1 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s1
4726 server s2 192.168.1.1:80 cookie s2
4727
4728 backend https
4729 mode tcp
4730 balance roundrobin
4731 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4732 stick on src
4733 server s1 192.168.1.1:443
4734 server s2 192.168.1.1:443
4735
4736 See also : "stick match" and "stick store-request"
4737
4738
4739stick store-request <pattern> [table <table>] [{if | unless} <condition>]
4740 Define a request pattern used to create an entry in a stickiness table
4741 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4742 no | no | yes | yes
4743
4744 Arguments :
4745 <pattern> is a pattern extraction rule as described in section 7.8. It
4746 describes what elements of the incoming request or connection
4747 will be analysed, extracted and stored in the table once a
4748 server is selected.
4749
4750 <table> is an optional stickiness table name. If unspecified, the same
4751 backend's table is used. A stickiness table is declared using
4752 the "stick-table" statement.
4753
4754 <cond> is an optional storage condition. It makes it possible to store
4755 certain criteria only when some conditions are met (or not met).
4756 For instance, it could be used to store the source IP address
4757 except when the request passes through a known proxy, in which
4758 case we'd store a converted form of a header containing that IP
4759 address.
4760
4761 Some protocols or applications require complex stickiness rules and cannot
4762 always simply rely on cookies nor hashing. The "stick store-request" statement
4763 describes a rule to decide what to extract from the request and when to do
4764 it, in order to store it into a stickiness table for further requests to
4765 match it using the "stick match" statement. Obviously the extracted part must
4766 make sense and have a chance to be matched in a further request. Storing a
4767 client's IP address for instance often makes sense. Storing an ID found in a
4768 URL parameter also makes sense. Storing a source port will almost never make
4769 any sense because it will be randomly matched. See section 7 for a complete
4770 list of possible patterns and transformation rules.
4771
4772 The table has to be declared using the "stick-table" statement. It must be of
4773 a type compatible with the pattern. By default it is the one which is present
4774 in the same backend. It is possible to share a table with other backends by
4775 referencing it using the "table" keyword. If another table is referenced,
4776 the server's ID inside the backends are used. By default, all server IDs
4777 start at 1 in each backend, so the server ordering is enough. But in case of
4778 doubt, it is highly recommended to force server IDs using their "id" setting.
4779
4780 It is possible to restrict the conditions where a "stick store-request"
4781 statement will apply, using "if" or "unless" followed by a condition. This
4782 condition will be evaluated while parsing the request, so any criteria can be
4783 used. See section 7 for ACL based conditions.
4784
4785 There is no limit on the number of "stick store-request" statements, but
4786 there is a limit of 8 simultaneous stores per request or response. This
4787 makes it possible to store up to 8 criteria, all extracted from either the
4788 request or the response, regardless of the number of rules. Only the 8 first
4789 ones which match will be kept. Using this, it is possible to feed multiple
4790 tables at once in the hope to increase the chance to recognize a user on
4791 another protocol or access method.
4792
4793 The "store-request" rules are evaluated once the server connection has been
4794 established, so that the table will contain the real server that processed
4795 the request.
4796
4797 Example :
4798 # forward SMTP users to the same server they just used for POP in the
4799 # last 30 minutes
4800 backend pop
4801 mode tcp
4802 balance roundrobin
4803 stick store-request src
4804 stick-table type ip size 200k expire 30m
4805 server s1 192.168.1.1:110
4806 server s2 192.168.1.1:110
4807
4808 backend smtp
4809 mode tcp
4810 balance roundrobin
4811 stick match src table pop
4812 server s1 192.168.1.1:25
4813 server s2 192.168.1.1:25
4814
4815 See also : "stick-table", "stick on", and section 7 about ACLs and pattern
4816 extraction.
4817
4818
4819stick-table type {ip | integer | string [len <length>] } size <size>
4820 [expire <expire>] [nopurge]
4821 Configure the stickiness table for the current backend
4822 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4823 no | no | yes | yes
4824
4825 Arguments :
4826 ip a table declared with "type ip" will only store IPv4 addresses.
4827 This form is very compact (about 50 bytes per entry) and allows
4828 very fast entry lookup and stores with almost no overhead. This
4829 is mainly used to store client source IP addresses.
4830
4831 integer a table declared with "type integer" will store 32bit integers
4832 which can represent a client identifier found in a request for
4833 instance.
4834
4835 string a table declared with "type string" will store substrings of up
4836 to <len> characters. If the string provided by the pattern
4837 extractor is larger than <len>, it will be truncated before
4838 being stored. During matching, at most <len> characters will be
4839 compared between the string in the table and the extracted
4840 pattern. When not specified, the string is automatically limited
4841 to 31 characters.
4842
4843 <length> is the maximum number of characters that will be stored in a
4844 "string" type table. See type "string" above. Be careful when
4845 changing this parameter as memory usage will proportionally
4846 increase.
4847
4848 <size> is the maximum number of entries that can fit in the table. This
4849 value directly impats memory usage. Count approximately 50 bytes
4850 per entry, plus the size of a string if any. The size supports
4851 suffixes "k", "m", "g" for 2^10, 2^20 and 2^30 factors.
4852
4853 [nopurge] indicates that we refuse to purge older entries when the table
4854 is full. When not specified and the table is full when haproxy
4855 wants to store an entry in it, it will flush a few of the oldest
4856 entries in order to release some space for the new ones. This is
4857 most often the desired behaviour. In some specific cases, it
4858 be desirable to refuse new entries instead of purging the older
4859 ones. That may be the case when the amount of data to store is
4860 far above the hardware limits and we prefer not to offer access
4861 to new clients than to reject the ones already connected. When
4862 using this parameter, be sure to properly set the "expire"
4863 parameter (see below).
4864
4865 <expire> defines the maximum duration of an entry in the table since it
4866 was last created, refreshed or matched. The expiration delay is
4867 defined using the standard time format, similarly as the various
4868 timeouts. The maximum duration is slightly above 24 days. See
4869 section 2.2 for more information. If this delay is not specified,
4870 the session won't automatically expire, but older entries will
4871 be removed once full. Be sure not to use the "nopurge" parameter
4872 if not expiration delay is specified.
4873
4874 The is only one stick-table per backend. At the moment of writing this doc,
4875 it does not seem useful to have multiple tables per backend. If this happens
4876 to be required, simply create a dummy backend with a stick-table in it and
4877 reference it.
4878
4879 It is important to understand that stickiness based on learning information
4880 has some limitations, including the fact that all learned associations are
4881 lost upon restart. In general it can be good as a complement but not always
4882 as an exclusive stickiness.
4883
4884 See also : "stick match", "stick on", "stick store-request", and section 2.2
4885 about time format.
4886
4887
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004888tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4889 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4890 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4891 no | yes | yes | no
4892
4893 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4894 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4895 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4896 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4897 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4898 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4899 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4900 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4901
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004902 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004903 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4904
4905 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4906 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4907 "reject" statement.
4908
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004909 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004910
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004911 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004912
4913
4914tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4915 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4916 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4917 no | yes | yes | no
4918
4919 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4920 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4921 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4922 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4923 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4924 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4925 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4926 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4927
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004928 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004929 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4930
4931 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4932 "accept".
4933
4934 Example:
4935 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4936 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4937 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4938 tcp-request reject if content_present
4939
4940 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4941 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4942 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4943 tcp-request accept if content_present
4944 tcp-request reject
4945
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004946 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004947
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004948 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004949
4950
4951tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4952 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4953 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4954 no | yes | yes | no
4955 Arguments :
4956 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4957 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4958 as explained at the top of this document.
4959
4960 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4961 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4962 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4963 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4964 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4965
4966 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4967 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004968 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004969 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004970 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4971 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4972 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4973 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004974
4975 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4976 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4977 it pass through unaffected.
4978
4979 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4980 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4981 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01004982 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004983 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
4984 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
4985 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
4986
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004987 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004988 "timeout client".
4989
4990
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004991timeout check <timeout>
4992 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
4993 established.
4994
4995 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4996 yes | no | yes | yes
4997 Arguments:
4998 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4999 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5000 as explained at the top of this document.
5001
5002 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
5003 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
5004 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
5005 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
5006 Of course it is better to use "check queue" and "check tarpit" instead of
5007 long "timeout connect".
5008
5009 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
5010 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
5011
5012 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
5013 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005014 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005015
5016 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5017 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5018 forget about it.
5019
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005020 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
5021 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005022
5023
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005024timeout client <timeout>
5025timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5026 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
5027 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5028 yes | yes | yes | no
5029 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005030 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005031 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5032 as explained at the top of this document.
5033
5034 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
5035 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5036 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
5037 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
5038 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
5039 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
5040 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
5041 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005042 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005043 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
5044 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
5045
5046 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
5047 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5048 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5049 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5050 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5051 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5052
5053 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
5054 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
5055 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5056
5057 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
5058
5059
5060timeout connect <timeout>
5061timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5062 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
5063 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5064 yes | no | yes | yes
5065 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005066 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005067 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5068 as explained at the top of this document.
5069
5070 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005071 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005072 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005073 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01005074 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
5075 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005076
5077 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5078 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5079 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5080 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5081 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
5082 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5083
5084 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
5085 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
5086 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5087
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01005088 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
5089 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005090
5091
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005092timeout http-keep-alive <timeout>
5093 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a new HTTP request to appear
5094 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5095 yes | yes | yes | yes
5096 Arguments :
5097 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5098 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5099 as explained at the top of this document.
5100
5101 By default, the time to wait for a new request in case of keep-alive is set
5102 by "timeout http-request". However this is not always convenient because some
5103 people want very short keep-alive timeouts in order to release connections
5104 faster, and others prefer to have larger ones but still have short timeouts
5105 once the request has started to present itself.
5106
5107 The "http-keep-alive" timeout covers these needs. It will define how long to
5108 wait for a new HTTP request to start coming after a response was sent. Once
5109 the first byte of request has been seen, the "http-request" timeout is used
5110 to wait for the complete request to come. Note that empty lines prior to a
5111 new request do not refresh the timeout and are not counted as a new request.
5112
5113 There is also another difference between the two timeouts : when a connection
5114 expires during timeout http-keep-alive, no error is returned, the connection
5115 just closes. If the connection expires in "http-request" while waiting for a
5116 connection to complete, a HTTP 408 error is returned.
5117
5118 In general it is optimal to set this value to a few tens to hundreds of
5119 milliseconds, to allow users to fetch all objects of a page at once but
5120 without waiting for further clicks. Also, if set to a very small value (eg:
5121 1 millisecond) it will probably only accept pipelined requests but not the
5122 non-pipelined ones. It may be a nice trade-off for very large sites running
5123 with tends to hundreds of thousands of clients.
5124
5125 If this parameter is not set, the "http-request" timeout applies, and if both
5126 are not set, "timeout client" still applies at the lower level. It should be
5127 set in the frontend to take effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in
5128 which case the HTTP backend's timeout will be used.
5129
5130 See also : "timeout http-request", "timeout client".
5131
5132
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005133timeout http-request <timeout>
5134 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
5135 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005136 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005137 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005138 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005139 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5140 as explained at the top of this document.
5141
5142 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
5143 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
5144 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
5145 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
5146 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
5147 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
5148 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
5149 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
5150
5151 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
5152 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005153 used anymore. It is used again on keep-alive connections to wait for a second
5154 request if "timeout http-keep-alive" is not set.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005155
5156 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
5157 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
5158 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
5159 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
5160 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
5161
5162 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02005163 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
5164 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
5165 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005166
Willy Tarreaub16a5742010-01-10 14:46:16 +01005167 See also : "timeout http-keep-alive", "timeout client".
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005168
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005169
5170timeout queue <timeout>
5171 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
5172 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5173 yes | no | yes | yes
5174 Arguments :
5175 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5176 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5177 as explained at the top of this document.
5178
5179 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
5180 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
5181 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
5182 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
5183 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
5184
5185 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
5186 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
5187 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
5188 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
5189
5190 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5191
5192
5193timeout server <timeout>
5194timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
5195 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
5196 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5197 yes | no | yes | yes
5198 Arguments :
5199 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
5200 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5201 as explained at the top of this document.
5202
5203 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
5204 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
5205 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
5206 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
5207 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
5208 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
5209 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
5210
5211 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5212 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5213 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
5214 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
5215 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005216 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005217 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005218 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005219
5220 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
5221 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
5222 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
5223 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
5224 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
5225 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
5226
5227 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
5228 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
5229 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
5230
5231 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
5232
5233
5234timeout tarpit <timeout>
5235 Set the duration for which tapitted connections will be maintained
5236 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5237 yes | yes | yes | yes
5238 Arguments :
5239 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
5240 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
5241 as explained at the top of this document.
5242
5243 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
5244 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
5245 defines how long it will be maintained open.
5246
5247 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
5248 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
5249 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
5250 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005251 with no "timeout tapit" parameter.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005252
5253 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
5254
5255
5256transparent (deprecated)
5257 Enable client-side transparent proxying
5258 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01005259 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005260 Arguments : none
5261
5262 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
5263 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
5264 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
5265 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
5266 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
5267 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
5268 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
5269 appropriate server.
5270
5271 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
5272
5273 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
5274 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
5275
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005276 See also: "option transparent"
5277
5278
5279use_backend <backend> if <condition>
5280use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005281 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005282 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
5283 no | yes | yes | no
5284 Arguments :
5285 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
5286
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005287 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005288
5289 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
5290 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
5291 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005292 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
5293 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
5294 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
5295 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005296
5297 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
5298 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
5299 assign the backend.
5300
5301 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
5302 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
5303 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
5304 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
5305 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
5306 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
5307
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005308 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005309 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02005310 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
5311 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
5312 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
5313
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02005314 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005315
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01005316
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +010053175. Server and default-server options
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01005318------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005319
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005320The "server" and "default-server" keywords support a certain number of settings
5321which are all passed as arguments on the server line. The order in which those
5322arguments appear does not count, and they are all optional. Some of those
5323settings are single words (booleans) while others expect one or several values
5324after them. In this case, the values must immediately follow the setting name.
5325Except default-server, all those settings must be specified after the server's
5326address if they are used:
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005327
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005328 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic6df0662010-01-05 16:38:49 +01005329 default-server [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005330
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005331The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005332
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005333addr <ipv4>
5334 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
5335 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
5336 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
5337 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
5338 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005339
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005340 Supported in default-server: No
5341
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005342backup
5343 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
5344 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
5345 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
5346 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
5347 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
5348 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005349
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005350 Supported in default-server: No
5351
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005352check
5353 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
5354 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
5355 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
5356 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
5357 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
5358 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
5359 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
5360 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
5361 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
Hervé COMMOWICK698ae002010-01-12 09:25:13 +01005362 "mysql-check" and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and
5363 parameters for more information.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005364
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005365 Supported in default-server: No
5366
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005367cookie <value>
5368 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
5369 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
5370 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
5371 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
5372 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
5373 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
5374 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
5375
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005376 Supported in default-server: No
5377
5378error-limit <count>
Willy Tarreau983e01e2010-01-11 18:42:06 +01005379 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the
5380 number of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error"
5381 option. By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005382
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005383 Supported in default-server: Yes
5384
5385 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005386
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005387fall <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005388 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
5389 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
5390 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
5391
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005392 Supported in default-server: Yes
5393
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005394id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02005395 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
5396 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
5397 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005398
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005399 Supported in default-server: No
5400
5401inter <delay>
5402fastinter <delay>
5403downinter <delay>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005404 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
5405 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
5406 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
5407 between checks depending on the server state :
5408
5409 Server state | Interval used
5410 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5411 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
5412 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5413 Transitionally UP (going down), |
5414 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5415 or yet unchecked. |
5416 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
5417 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
5418 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005419
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005420 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
5421 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
5422 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
5423 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
5424 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
5425 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
5426 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
5427 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
5428 servers.
5429
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005430 Supported in default-server: Yes
5431
5432maxconn <maxconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005433 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
5434 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
5435 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
5436 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
5437 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
5438 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
5439 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
5440 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
5441
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005442 Supported in default-server: Yes
5443
5444maxqueue <maxqueue>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005445 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
5446 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
5447 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
5448 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
5449 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
5450 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
5451 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
5452
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005453 Supported in default-server: Yes
5454
5455minconn <minconn>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005456 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
5457 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
5458 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
5459 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
5460 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
5461 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005462 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005463 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005464
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005465 Supported in default-server: Yes
5466
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005467observe <mode>
5468 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
5469 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
5470 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
5471 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
5472 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
5473 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
5474 headers, a timeout, etc.
5475
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005476 Supported in default-server: No
5477
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005478 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
5479
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005480on-error <mode>
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005481 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
5482 Currently, four modes are available:
5483 - fastinter: force fastinter
5484 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
5485 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
5486 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
5487 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
5488
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005489 Supported in default-server: Yes
5490
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01005491 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
5492
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005493port <port>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005494 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
5495 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
5496 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
5497 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
5498 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
5499 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
5500
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005501 Supported in default-server: Yes
5502
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005503redir <prefix>
5504 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
5505 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
5506 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
5507 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
5508 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
5509 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
5510 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
5511 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005512 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005513 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
5514 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
5515 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
5516 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
5517 loop between the client and HAProxy!
5518
5519 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
5520
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005521 Supported in default-server: No
5522
5523rise <count>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005524 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
5525 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
5526 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
5527
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005528 Supported in default-server: Yes
5529
5530slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005531 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
5532 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
5533 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
5534 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
5535 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
5536 parameters :
5537
5538 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
5539 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
5540
5541 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
5542 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
5543 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
5544 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
5545
5546 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
5547 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
5548 seen as failed.
5549
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005550 Supported in default-server: Yes
5551
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005552source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
5553source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005554 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
5555 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
5556 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
5557 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
5558
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02005559 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
5560 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
5561 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
5562 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
5563 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
5564 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
5565 server.
5566
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005567 Supported in default-server: No
5568
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005569track [<proxy>/]<server>
5570 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
5571 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
5572 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
5573 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
5574 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
5575
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005576 Supported in default-server: No
5577
5578weight <weight>
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005579 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
5580 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
5581 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02005582 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
5583 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
5584 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
5585 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
5586 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
5587 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005588
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic53601c2010-01-06 10:50:42 +01005589 Supported in default-server: Yes
5590
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005591
55926. HTTP header manipulation
5593---------------------------
5594
5595In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
5596response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
5597request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
5598which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
5599against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
5600to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
5601passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
5602headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
5603never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
5604
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005605There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
5606(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
5607rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
5608messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
5609in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005610happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02005611add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
5612normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
5613
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005614This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
5615in section 4.2 :
5616
5617 - reqadd <string>
5618 - reqallow <search>
5619 - reqiallow <search>
5620 - reqdel <search>
5621 - reqidel <search>
5622 - reqdeny <search>
5623 - reqideny <search>
5624 - reqpass <search>
5625 - reqipass <search>
5626 - reqrep <search> <replace>
5627 - reqirep <search> <replace>
5628 - reqtarpit <search>
5629 - reqitarpit <search>
5630 - rspadd <string>
5631 - rspdel <search>
5632 - rspidel <search>
5633 - rspdeny <search>
5634 - rspideny <search>
5635 - rsprep <search> <replace>
5636 - rspirep <search> <replace>
5637
5638With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
5639is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
5640parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
5641prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
5642Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
5643
5644 \t for a tab
5645 \r for a carriage return (CR)
5646 \n for a new line (LF)
5647 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
5648 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
5649 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
5650 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
5651 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
5652
5653The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
5654portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
5655above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
5656regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
56579 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
5658is very common to users of the "sed" program.
5659
5660The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
5661after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
5662
5663Notes related to these keywords :
5664---------------------------------
5665 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
5666 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
5667 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
5668
5669 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
5670 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
5671 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
5672
5673 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
5674 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
5675 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
5676 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
5677 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
5678
5679 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
5680 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
5681 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
5682 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
5683 useless headers before adding new ones.
5684
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005685 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005686 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
5687
5688 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
5689 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
5690 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
5691
5692 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
5693 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005694 before switching.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005695
5696
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010056977. Using ACLs and pattern extraction
5698------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005699
5700The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
5701content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
5702from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
5703simple :
5704
5705 - define test criteria with sets of values
5706 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
5707
5708The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
5709
5710In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
5711
5712 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5713
5714This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5715Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5716and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5717an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5718of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5719
5720ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5721'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5722which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5723
5724There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5725performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5726
5727The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5728
5729 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005730 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5731
5732Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005733
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005734 - integers or integer ranges
5735 - strings
5736 - regular expressions
5737 - IP addresses and networks
5738
5739
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057407.1. Matching integers
5741----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005742
5743Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5744that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5745expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5746may be omitted.
5747
5748For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5749unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5750representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5751
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005752As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5753two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5754instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5755ranges and operators.
5756
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005757For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005758operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5759Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5760of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005761
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005762Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005763
5764 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5765 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5766 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5767 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5768 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5769
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005770For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005771
5772 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5773
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005774This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5775
5776 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5777
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005778
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057797.2. Matching strings
5780---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005781
5782String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5783exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5784characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5785string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5786to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005787before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005788
5789
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020057907.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5791-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005792
5793Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5794they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5795possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5796passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5797the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005798the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5799match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005800
5801
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058027.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5803----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005804
5805IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5806netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5807within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005808host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005809difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5810at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5811does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5812parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005813
5814
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058157.5. Available matching criteria
5816--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005817
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058187.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5819------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005820
5821A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5822analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5823addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5824
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005825always_false
5826 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5827 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5828
5829always_true
5830 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5831 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5832
5833src <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005834 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005835 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5836 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5837
5838src_port <integer>
5839 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
5840
5841dst <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005842 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005843 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
5844
5845dst_port <integer>
5846 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5847 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5848
5849dst_conn <integer>
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005850 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005851 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005852 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005853 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5854 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5855 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5856
5857fe_conn <integer>
5858fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5859 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5860 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5861 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5862 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5863 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5864 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5865 criteria.
5866
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki346f76d2010-01-12 21:59:30 +01005867fe_id <integer>
5868 Applies to the fronted's id. Can be used in backends to check from which
5869 frontend it was called.
5870
5871so_id <integer>
5872 Applies to the socket's id. Useful in frontends with many bind keywords.
5873
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005874be_conn <integer>
5875be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5876 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5877 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5878 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5879 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5880 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005881
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005882nbsrv <integer>
5883nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5884 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5885 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5886 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5887 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5888 "monitor fail".
5889
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005890connslots <integer>
5891connslots(backend) <integer>
5892 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005893 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005894 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5895
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005896 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5897 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005898
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005899 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005900 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5901 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5902 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5903 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5904 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005905 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005906
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005907 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5908 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5909 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5910 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005911
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005912queue <integer>
5913queue(frontend) <integer>
5914 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5915 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5916 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5917 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5918 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5919 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5920 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5921
5922avg_queue <integer>
5923avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5924 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5925 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5926 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5927 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5928 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5929 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5930 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5931 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5932 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5933 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5934 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5935
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005936fe_sess_rate <integer>
5937fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5938 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5939 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5940 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5941 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5942 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5943 the rate to go down below the limit.
5944
5945 Example :
5946 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5947 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5948 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5949 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5950 frontend mail
5951 bind :25
5952 mode tcp
5953 maxconn 100
5954 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5955 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5956 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5957 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01005958
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005959be_sess_rate <integer>
5960be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5961 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5962 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5963 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005964 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005965 sucking of an online dictionary).
5966
5967 Example :
5968 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5969 backend dynamic
5970 mode http
5971 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5972 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
5973
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005974
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020059757.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
5976-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005977
5978A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
5979during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
5980through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
5981for more detailed information on the subject.
5982
5983req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005984 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005985 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
5986 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
5987 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
5988 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
5989 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
5990 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
5991
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005992req_proto_http
5993 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
5994 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005995 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005996 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
5997 using TCP request content inspection rules.
5998
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005999req_rdp_cookie <string>
6000req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
6001 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
6002 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
6003 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
6004 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
6005 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
6006 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
6007 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
6008 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
6009
6010req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
6011req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
6012 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
6013 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
6014 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
6015 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
6016 cookies.
6017
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006018req_ssl_ver <decimal>
6019 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
6020 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
6021 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
6022 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
6023 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
6024 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
6025 with TCP request content inspection.
6026
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02006027wait_end
6028 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
6029 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
6030 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
6031 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
6032 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
6033 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
6034 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
6035 inspection.
6036
6037 Examples :
6038 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
6039 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
6040 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
6041
6042 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
6043 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
6044 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
6045 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
6046 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
6047 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
6048 tcp-request content reject
6049
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006050
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060517.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
6052--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006053
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02006054A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006055application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
6056read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
6057than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
6058
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006059method <string>
6060 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
6061 already check for most common methods.
6062
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006063status <integer>
6064 Applies to the HTTP status code in the HTTP response, eg: "302". It can be
6065 used to act on responses depending on status ranges, for instance, remove
6066 any Location header if the response is not a 3xx.
6067
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006068req_ver <string>
6069 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
6070 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
6071
6072path <string>
6073 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
6074 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
6075 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
6076
6077path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006078 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
6079 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006080
6081path_end <string>
6082 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
6083 control file name extension.
6084
6085path_sub <string>
6086 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6087 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
6088 "path_dir".
6089
6090path_dir <string>
6091 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6092 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6093 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6094 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
6095
6096path_dom <string>
6097 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6098 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
6099 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
6100
6101path_reg <regex>
6102 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6103 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6104 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
6105
6106url <string>
6107 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
6108 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
6109
6110url_beg <string>
6111 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
6112 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
6113
6114url_end <string>
6115 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
6116 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
6117
6118url_sub <string>
6119 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
6120 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
6121
6122url_dir <string>
6123 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
6124 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
6125 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
6126 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
6127
6128url_dom <string>
6129 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
6130 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
6131 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
6132
6133url_reg <regex>
6134 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
6135 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
6136 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
6137
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006138url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006139 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
6140 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006141 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006142
6143url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006144 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
6145 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006146 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006147 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01006148
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006149hdr <string>
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006150hdr(header) <string>
6151 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
6152 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006153 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
6154 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006155 Use the shdr() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006156
6157 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006158 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006159 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
6160
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006161 hdr(Connection) -i close
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006162
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006163hdr_beg <string>
6164hdr_beg(header) <string>
6165 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006166 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_beg() variant for
6167 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01006168
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006169hdr_end <string>
6170hdr_end(header) <string>
6171 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006172 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_end() variant for
6173 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006174
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006175hdr_sub <string>
6176hdr_sub(header) <string>
6177 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006178 for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_sub() variant for
6179 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006180
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006181hdr_dir <string>
6182hdr_dir(header) <string>
6183 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6184 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
6185 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006186 information on header matching. Use the shdr_dir() variant for response
6187 headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006188
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006189hdr_dom <string>
6190hdr_dom(header) <string>
6191 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
6192 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
6193 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006194 header matching. Use the shdr_dom() variant for response headers sent by the
6195 server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006196
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006197hdr_reg <regex>
6198hdr_reg(header) <regex>
6199 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
6200 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
6201 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006202 "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the shdr_reg() variant for
6203 response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006204
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006205hdr_val <integer>
6206hdr_val(header) <integer>
6207 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
6208 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
6209 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006210 matching. Use the shdr_val() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006211
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006212hdr_cnt <integer>
6213hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
6214 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
6215 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
6216 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
6217 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006218 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006219 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use
6220 the shdr_cnt() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic8b16fc2008-02-18 01:26:35 +01006221
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006222hdr_ip <ip_address>
6223hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
6224 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
6225 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
Willy Tarreauc097e322010-01-31 15:54:35 +01006226 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching. Use the
6227 shdr_ip() variant for response headers sent by the server.
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02006228
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki6b35ce12010-02-01 23:35:44 +01006229http_auth(userlist)
6230http_auth_group(userlist) <group> [<group>]*
6231 Returns true when authentication data received from the client matches
6232 username & password stored on the userlist. It is also possible to
6233 use http_auth_group to check if the user is assigned to at least one
6234 of specified groups.
6235
6236 Currently only http basic auth is supported.
6237
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01006238
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062397.6. Pre-defined ACLs
6240---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006241
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006242Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
6243every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
6244order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
6245only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006246
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006247ACL name Equivalent to Usage
6248---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
6249TRUE always_true always match
6250FALSE always_false never match
6251LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02006252HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006253HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
6254HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
6255METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
6256METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
6257METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
6258METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
6259METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
6260METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
6261HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006262HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006263HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
6264HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02006265RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006266REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
6267WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
6268---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006269
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006270
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062717.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
6272----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006273
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006274Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
6275combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006276
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006277 - AND (implicit)
6278 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
6279 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006280
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006281A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006282
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006283 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006284
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006285Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
6286indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006287
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006288For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
6289"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
6290requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
6291is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006292
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006293 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6294 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
6295 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
6296 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006297
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006298To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
6299and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006300
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006301 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
6302 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
6303 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
6304 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006305
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006306 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
6307 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
6308 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
6309 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006310
Willy Tarreau95fa4692010-02-01 13:05:50 +01006311It is also possible to form rules using "anonymous ACLs". Those are unnamed ACL
6312expressions that are built on the fly without needing to be declared. They must
6313be enclosed between braces, with a space before and after each brace (because
6314the braces must be seen as independant words). Example :
6315
6316 The following rule :
6317
6318 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
6319 block if METH_POST missing_cl
6320
6321 Can also be written that way :
6322
6323 block if METH_POST { hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0 }
6324
6325It is generally not recommended to use this construct because it's a lot easier
6326to leave errors in the configuration when written that way. However, for very
6327simple rules matching only one source IP address for instance, it can make more
6328sense to use them than to declare ACLs with random names. Another example of
6329good use is the following :
6330
6331 With named ACLs :
6332
6333 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
6334 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
6335 monitor fail if site_dead
6336
6337 With anonymous ACLs :
6338
6339 monitor fail if { nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2 } || { nbsrv(static) lt 2 }
6340
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006341See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01006342
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01006343
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +010063447.8. Pattern extraction
6345-----------------------
6346
6347The stickiness features relies on pattern extraction in the request and
6348response. Sometimes the data needs to be converted first before being stored,
6349for instance converted from ASCII to IP or upper case to lower case.
6350
6351All these operations of data extraction and conversion are defined as
6352"pattern extraction rules". A pattern rule always has the same format. It
6353begins with a single pattern fetch word, potentially followed by a list of
6354arguments within parenthesis then an optional list of transformations. As
6355much as possible, the pattern fetch functions use the same name as their
6356equivalent used in ACLs.
6357
6358The list of currently supported pattern fetch functions is the following :
6359
6360 src This is the source IPv4 address of the client of the session.
6361 It is of type IP and only works with such tables.
6362
6363 dst This is the destination IPv4 address of the session on the
6364 client side, which is the address the client connected to.
6365 It can be useful when running in transparent mode. It is of
6366 typie IP and only works with such tables.
6367
6368 dst_port This is the destination TCP port of the session on the client
6369 side, which is the port the client connected to. This might be
6370 used when running in transparent mode or when assigning dynamic
6371 ports to some clients for a whole application session. It is of
6372 type integer and only works with such tables.
6373
6374
6375The currently available list of transformations include :
6376
6377 lower Convert a string pattern to lower case. This can only be placed
6378 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6379 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6380
6381 upper Convert a string pattern to upper case. This can only be placed
6382 after a string pattern fetch function or after a conversion
6383 function returning a string type. The result is of type string.
6384
Willy Tarreaud31d6eb2010-01-26 18:01:41 +01006385 ipmask(mask) Apply a mask to an IPv4 address, and use the result for lookups
6386 and storage. This can be used to make all hosts within a
6387 certain mask to share the same table entries and as such use
6388 the same server. The mask can be passed in dotted form (eg:
6389 255.255.255.0) or in CIDR form (eg: 24).
6390
Willy Tarreaub937b7e2010-01-12 15:27:54 +01006391
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020063928. Logging
6393----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006394
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006395One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
6396provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
6397very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
6398provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
6399state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006400to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006401headers.
6402
6403In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
6404about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
6405send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
6406
6407 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
6408 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
6409 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
6410 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
6411 at the termination.
6412
6413The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
6414allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
6415as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
6416while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
6417real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
6418delay.
6419
6420
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064218.1. Log levels
6422---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006423
6424TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
6425source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
6426HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
6427in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
6428particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006429syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006430facilities.
6431
6432
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064338.2. Log formats
6434----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006435
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006436HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006437and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
6438the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
6439formats are the following ones :
6440
6441 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
6442 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
6443 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
6444 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
6445 extents.
6446
6447 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
6448 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
6449 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
6450 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
6451 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
6452
6453 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
6454 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
6455 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
6456 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
6457 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
6458
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02006459 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
6460 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
6461 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
6462 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
6463
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006464Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
6465specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
6466field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
6467servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
6468always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
6469identifier.
6470
6471Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
6472 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
6473 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
6474 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
6475 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
6476
6477
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020064788.2.1. Default log format
6479-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006480
6481This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
6482as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
6483format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
6484
6485 Example :
6486 listen www
6487 mode http
6488 log global
6489 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6490
6491 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
6492 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
6493 (www/HTTP)
6494
6495 Field Format Extract from the example above
6496 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
6497 2 'Connect from' Connect from
6498 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
6499 4 'to' to
6500 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
6501 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
6502
6503Detailed fields description :
6504 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
6505 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6506 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
6507 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
6508 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6509 and processed the connection.
6510 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
6511
6512It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
6513will eventually disappear.
6514
6515
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065168.2.2. TCP log format
6517---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006518
6519The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
6520is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
6521information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
6522counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
6523emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
6524environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
6525the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
6526sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006527specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
6528not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
6529fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
6530marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006531
6532 Example :
6533 frontend fnt
6534 mode tcp
6535 option tcplog
6536 log global
6537 default_backend bck
6538
6539 backend bck
6540 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6541
6542 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
6543 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
6544 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
6545
6546 Field Format Extract from the example above
6547 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
6548 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
6549 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
6550 4 frontend_name fnt
6551 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
6552 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
6553 7 bytes_read* 212
6554 8 termination_state --
6555 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
6556 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6557
6558Detailed fields description :
6559 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6560 connection to haproxy.
6561
6562 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6563
6564 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
6565 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
6566 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
6567 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
6568
6569 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6570 and processed the connection.
6571
6572 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6573 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6574 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
6575 applications.
6576
6577 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6578 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6579 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6580 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
6581 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
6582
6583 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6584 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6585 See "Timers" below for more details.
6586
6587 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6588 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6589 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
6590 "Timers" below for more details.
6591
6592 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6593 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6594 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6595 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6596 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6597 details.
6598
6599 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
6600 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
6601 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
6602 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
6603 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
6604
6605 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6606 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6607 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
6608 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
6609 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
6610 for more details.
6611
6612 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6613 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6614 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
6615 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
6616 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006617 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006618
6619 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6620 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6621 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6622 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6623 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6624 caused by a denial of service attack.
6625
6626 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6627 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6628 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6629 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6630 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6631 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6632 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6633 denial of service attack.
6634
6635 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6636 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6637 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6638 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6639 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6640 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6641 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6642 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
6643 be processed than on other servers.
6644
6645 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6646 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6647 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6648 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6649 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6650 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6651 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6652 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6653 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6654 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6655 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6656 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6657 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6658
6659 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6660 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6661 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6662 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6663 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6664 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6665 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6666 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6667
6668 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6669 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6670 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6671 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6672 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6673 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6674 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6675 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6676 occurs.
6677
6678
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066798.2.3. HTTP log format
6680----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006681
6682The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
6683is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
6684the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
6685are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
6686emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
6687generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
6688"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
6689which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006690frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
6691is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006692
6693Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
6694slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
6695with a star ('*') after the field name below.
6696
6697 Example :
6698 frontend http-in
6699 mode http
6700 option httplog
6701 log global
6702 default_backend bck
6703
6704 backend static
6705 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
6706
6707 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
6708 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
6709 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006710 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006711
6712 Field Format Extract from the example above
6713 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
6714 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
6715 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
6716 4 frontend_name http-in
6717 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
6718 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
6719 7 status_code 200
6720 8 bytes_read* 2750
6721 9 captured_request_cookie -
6722 10 captured_response_cookie -
6723 11 termination_state ----
6724 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
6725 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
6726 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
6727 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
6728 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01006729
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006730
6731Detailed fields description :
6732 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
6733 connection to haproxy.
6734
6735 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
6736
6737 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
6738 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
6739 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
6740 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
6741 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
6742
6743 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
6744 and processed the connection.
6745
6746 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
6747 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
6748 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
6749
6750 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
6751 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
6752 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
6753 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
6754 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
6755 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
6756
6757 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
6758 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
6759 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
6760 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
6761 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
6762 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
6763
6764 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
6765 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
6766 See "Timers" below for more details.
6767
6768 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
6769 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
6770 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
6771 below for more details.
6772
6773 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
6774 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
6775 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
6776 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
6777 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
6778 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
6779 for more details.
6780
6781 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
6782 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
6783 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
6784 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
6785 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
6786 details.
6787
6788 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
6789 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
6790 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
6791
6792 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
6793 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
6794 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
6795 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
6796 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
6797 overflowing.
6798
6799 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
6800 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
6801 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
6802 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
6803 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
6804 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
6805 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
6806 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6807
6808 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
6809 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
6810 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
6811 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
6812 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
6813 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
6814 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
6815 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
6816
6817 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
6818 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
6819 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
6820 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6821 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6822 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6823 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6824
6825 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6826 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6827 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6828 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6829 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006830 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006831 system.
6832
6833 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6834 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6835 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6836 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6837 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6838 caused by a denial of service attack.
6839
6840 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6841 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6842 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6843 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6844 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6845 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6846 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6847 denial of service attack.
6848
6849 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6850 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6851 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6852 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6853 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6854 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6855 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6856 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6857 processed than on other servers.
6858
6859 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6860 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6861 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6862 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6863 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6864 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6865 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6866 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6867 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6868 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6869 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6870 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6871 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6872
6873 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6874 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6875 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6876 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6877 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6878 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6879 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6880 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6881
6882 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6883 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6884 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6885 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6886 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6887 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6888 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6889 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6890 occurs.
6891
6892 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6893 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6894 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6895 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6896 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6897 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6898 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6899 cookies" below for more details.
6900
6901 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6902 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6903 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6904 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6905 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6906 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6907 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6908 and cookies" below for more details.
6909
6910 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6911 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6912 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6913 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6914 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6915 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6916 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6917 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6918
6919
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069208.3. Advanced logging options
6921-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006922
6923Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6924just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6925options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6926for more information about their usage.
6927
6928
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069298.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6930------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006931
6932It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6933haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6934commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6935monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6936ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6937
6938 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6939 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6940 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6941 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6942
6943 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6944 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6945 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6946 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6947 such as other load-balancers.
6948
6949 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6950 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6951 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6952
6953
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069548.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6955----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006956
6957The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6958what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6959or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6960"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6961just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6962log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6963after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6964is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6965with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6966with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6967
6968
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069698.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6970------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006971
6972Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6973for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
6974"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
6975retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
6976raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
6977a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
6978file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
6979you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
6980"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
6981
6982
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069838.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
6984--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006985
6986Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
6987multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
6988them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
6989"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
6990logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
6991error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
6992and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
6993too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
6994useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
6995alternative.
6996
6997
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020069988.4. Timing events
6999------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007000
7001Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
7002reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
7003the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
7004frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
7005mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
7006
7007 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
7008 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
7009 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
7010 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
7011 the client closes prematurely or times out.
7012
7013 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
7014 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
7015 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
7016 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
7017 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
7018
7019 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
7020 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
7021 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
7022 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
7023 connection never established.
7024
7025 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
7026 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
7027 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
7028 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
7029 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
7030 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
7031 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
7032 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
7033 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
7034 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
7035 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
7036
7037 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
7038 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
7039 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
7040 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
7041 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
7042
7043 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
7044
7045 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
7046 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
7047 negative.
7048
7049These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
7050protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
7051that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007052due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007053close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
7054session has been aborted on timeout.
7055
7056Most common cases :
7057
7058 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7059 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
7060 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
7061 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
7062 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
7063 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
7064 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
7065 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
7066 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
7067 connections have been accepted at once.
7068
7069 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
7070 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
7071 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
7072 of ms on remote networks.
7073
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007074 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
7075 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
7076 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007077
7078 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
7079 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
7080 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
7081 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
7082 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
7083 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
7084 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
7085 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
7086 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
7087 to the server until another one is released.
7088
7089Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
7090
7091 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
7092 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
7093 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
7094
7095 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
7096 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
7097 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
7098
7099 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
7100 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
7101 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
7102 flags.
7103
7104 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
7105 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
7106 Check the session termination flags, then check the
7107 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
7108 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
7109 the client connection was maintained open.
7110
7111 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
7112 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
7113 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
7114 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
7115
7116
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020071178.5. Session state at disconnection
7118-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007119
7120TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
7121"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
71222-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
7123each of which has a special meaning :
7124
7125 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
7126 session to terminate :
7127
7128 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
7129
7130 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
7131 server explicitly refused it.
7132
7133 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
7134 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
7135 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
7136 error in server response which might have caused information leak
7137 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
7138 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
7139
7140 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
7141 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
7142 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
7143 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
7144 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
7145
7146 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
7147 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
7148 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
7149 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
7150 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
7151
7152 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
7153 send or receive data.
7154
7155 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
7156 send or receive data.
7157
7158 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
7159 with nothing left in the buffers.
7160
7161 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
7162
7163 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
7164 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
7165
7166 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
7167 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
7168 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
7169 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
7170 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
7171
7172 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
7173 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
7174
7175 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
7176 server (HTTP only).
7177
7178 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
7179
7180 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
7181 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
7182 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
7183
7184 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
7185 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
7186 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
7187
7188 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
7189
7190 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
7191 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
7192
7193 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
7194 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
7195 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
7196
7197 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
7198 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
7199 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
7200
7201 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
7202 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
7203 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
7204 another server.
7205
7206 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
7207 server.
7208
7209 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7210
7211 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
7212 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
7213
7214 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
7215
7216 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
7217 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
7218 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
7219
7220 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
7221
7222 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
7223 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
7224
7225 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
7226
7227 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
7228
7229The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
7230happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
7231helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
7232starvation, attacks, etc...
7233
7234The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
7235alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
7236easier finding and understanding.
7237
7238 Flags Reason
7239
7240 -- Normal termination.
7241
7242 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
7243 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
7244 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
7245 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
7246
7247 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
7248 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
7249 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
7250 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
7251 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
7252 by the client.
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007253
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007254 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7255 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
7256 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
7257
7258 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
7259 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
7260 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
7261
7262 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
7263 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
7264 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
7265 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
7266 the server takes too long to respond.
7267
7268 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
7269 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
7270 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
7271 long a time to respond.
7272
7273 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
7274 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
7275 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
7276 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
7277 and the client.
7278
7279 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
7280 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
7281 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
7282 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
7283 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
7284 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
7285
7286 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
7287 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02007288 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
7289 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
7290 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
7291 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007292
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007293 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007294 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
7295 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
7296 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
7297 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
7298 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
7299
7300 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
7301 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
7302 503 or 504 here.
7303
7304 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
7305 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
7306 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
7307 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
7308 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
7309
7310 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
7311 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007312 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007313 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
7314 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
7315
7316 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
7317 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
7318 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
7319 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
7320 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
7321 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
7322 between haproxy and the server.
7323
7324 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
7325 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
7326 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
7327 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
7328 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
7329 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
7330 solution is to fix the application.
7331
7332 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
7333 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
7334 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
7335 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
7336 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
7337 external attacks.
7338
7339 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
7340 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
7341 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
7342 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
7343 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
7344
7345 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
7346 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
7347 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
7348 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
7349 containing unauthorized characters.
7350
7351 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
7352 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
7353 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
7354 returned an HTTP 403 error.
7355
7356 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
7357 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
7358 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
7359 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
7360
7361 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
7362 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
7363 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
7364 only be solved by proper system tuning.
7365
7366
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073678.6. Non-printable characters
7368-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007369
7370In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
7371consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
7372converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
7373prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
7374being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
7375escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
7376is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
7377'}' when logging headers.
7378
7379Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
7380issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
7381containing spaces is "User-Agent".
7382
7383Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
7384the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
7385performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
7386
7387
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020073888.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
7389---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007390
7391Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
7392achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007393section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007394cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
7395the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
7396the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007397locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007398not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
7399user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
7400a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
7401wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
7402
7403 Examples :
7404 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
7405 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
7406
7407 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
7408 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
7409
7410
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074118.8. Capturing HTTP headers
7412---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007413
7414Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
7415proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
7416the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
7417server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
7418
7419Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
7420response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007421section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007422
7423It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007424time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
7425appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007426are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
7427and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
7428follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
7429request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
7430in the logs.
7431
7432 Example :
7433 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
7434 listen proxy-out
7435 mode http
7436 option httplog
7437 option logasap
7438 log global
7439 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
7440
7441 # log the name of the virtual server
7442 capture request header Host len 20
7443
7444 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
7445 capture request header Content-Length len 10
7446
7447 # log the beginning of the referrer
7448 capture request header Referer len 20
7449
7450 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
7451 capture response header Server len 20
7452
7453 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
7454 capture response header Content-Length len 10
7455
7456 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
7457 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
7458
7459 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
7460 capture response header Via len 20
7461
7462 # log the URL location during a redirection
7463 capture response header Location len 20
7464
7465 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
7466 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
7467 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7468 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
7469 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
7470
7471 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7472 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7473 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7474 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007475 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007476
7477 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
7478 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
7479 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
7480 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
7481 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007482 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007483
7484
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020074858.9. Examples of logs
7486---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007487
7488These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
7489them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
7490reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
7491
7492 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
7493 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7494 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7495
7496 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
7497 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
7498
7499 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
7500 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
7501 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
7502
7503 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
7504 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
7505
7506 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
7507 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
7508 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
7509
7510 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007511 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007512 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
7513 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
7514
7515 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
7516 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
7517 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
7518
7519 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
7520 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
7521 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
7522 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
7523 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
7524 to return the 502 and not the server.
7525
7526 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007527 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007528
7529 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
7530 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
7531 Nothing was sent to any server.
7532
7533 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
7534 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
7535
7536 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
7537 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
7538 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
7539 send a 408 return code to the client.
7540
7541 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
7542 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
7543
7544 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
7545 5 seconds ("c----").
7546
7547 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
7548 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
Willy Tarreaud72758d2010-01-12 10:42:19 +01007549 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007550
7551 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007552 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01007553 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
7554 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
7555 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
7556 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
7557 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007558
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007559
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020075609. Statistics and monitoring
7561----------------------------
7562
7563It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
7564mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
7565CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
7566Unix socket.
7567
7568
75699.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007570---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007571
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01007572The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
7573page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
7574
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007575 0. pxname: proxy name
7576 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
7577 for server)
7578 2. qcur: current queued requests
7579 3. qmax: max queued requests
7580 4. scur: current sessions
7581 5. smax: max sessions
7582 6. slim: sessions limit
7583 7. stot: total sessions
7584 8. bin: bytes in
7585 9. bout: bytes out
7586 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007587 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007588 12. ereq: request errors
7589 13. econ: connection errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007590 14. eresp: response errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007591 15. wretr: retries (warning)
7592 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007593 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/NOLB/MAINT/MAINT(via)...)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01007594 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
7595 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
7596 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
7597 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
7598 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
7599 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
7600 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
7601 25. qlimit: queue limit
7602 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
7603 27. iid: unique proxy id
7604 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
7605 29. throttle: warm up status
7606 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
7607 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02007608 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02007609 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
7610 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
7611 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007612 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
Cyril Bontéf0c60612010-02-06 14:44:47 +01007613 UNK -> unknown
7614 INI -> initializing
7615 SOCKERR -> socket error
7616 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
7617 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
7618 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example
7619 "Connection refused" (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
7620 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
7621 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
7622 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
7623 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
7624 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
7625 disable-on-404
7626 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
7627 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
7628 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02007629 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
7630 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007631 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
7632 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
7633 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
7634 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
7635 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
7636 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01007637
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007638
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020076399.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007640-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007641
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007642The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007643must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
7644is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
7645a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
7646risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
7647followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
7648given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
7649then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
7650to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007651
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007652It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
7653on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
7654own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007655
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007656help
7657 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
7658 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01007659
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007660prompt
7661 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
7662 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
7663 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
7664 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
7665 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
7666 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
7667 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
7668 command.
7669
7670quit
7671 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007672
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007673show errors [<iid>]
7674 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
7675 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007676 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
7677 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
7678 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007679
7680 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
7681 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
7682 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
7683 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
7684 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
7685 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
7686 are reported too.
7687
7688 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
7689 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
7690 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
7691 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
7692 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
7693 code.
7694
7695 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
7696 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
7697 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
7698 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
7699 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
7700 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
7701 line.
7702
7703 Example :
7704 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
7705 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
7706 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
7707 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
7708
7709 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
7710 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
7711 00038 Location: blah\r\n
7712 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
7713 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
7714 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
7715 00204+ minal\r\n
7716 00211 \r\n
7717
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02007718 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01007719 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
7720 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
7721 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
7722 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
7723 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
7724 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01007725
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007726show info
7727 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
7728
7729show sess
7730 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007731 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
7732 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
7733
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007734
7735show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
7736 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
7737 possible to dump only selected items :
7738 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
7739 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
7740 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
7741 for example:
7742 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
7743 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
7744 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
7745
7746 Example :
7747 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
7748 Name: HAProxy
7749 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
7750 Release_date: 2009/09/23
7751 Nbproc: 1
7752 Process_num: 1
7753 (...)
7754
7755 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
7756 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
7757 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
7758 (...)
7759 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
7760
7761 $
7762
7763 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
7764 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
7765 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
7766 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01007767 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02007768
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007769clear counters
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007770 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
7771 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
7772 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007773 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
7774 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02007775
7776clear counters all
7777 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02007778 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
7779 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
7780
Cyril Bontécd19e512010-01-31 22:34:03 +01007781disable server <backend>/<server>
7782 Mark the server DOWN for maintenance. In this mode, no more checks will be
7783 performed on the server until it leaves maintenance.
7784 If the server is tracked by other servers, those servers will be set to DOWN
7785 during the maintenance.
7786
Cyril Bonté0dae5852010-02-03 00:26:28 +01007787 In the statistics page, a server DOWN for maintenance will appear with a
7788 "MAINT" status, its tracking servers with the "MAINT(via)" one.
7789
Cyril Bontécd19e512010-01-31 22:34:03 +01007790 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7791 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7792
7793 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7794 level "admin".
7795
7796enable server <backend>/<server>
7797 If the server was previously marked as DOWN for maintenance, this marks the
7798 server UP and checks are re-enabled.
7799
7800 Both the backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by
7801 their numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
7802
7803 This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets configured for
7804 level "admin".
7805
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007806get weight <backend>/<server>
7807 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
7808 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
7809 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007810 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
7811 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
7812 dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02007813
Willy Tarreau7aabd112010-01-26 10:59:06 +01007814set timeout cli <delay>
7815 Change the CLI interface timeout for current connection. This can be useful
7816 during long debugging sessions where the user needs to constantly inspect
7817 some indicators without being disconnected. The delay is passed in seconds.
7818
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007819set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
7820 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
7821 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
7822 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
7823 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
7824 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
7825 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
7826 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
7827 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
7828 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
7829 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
7830 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02007831 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
7832 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
7833 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02007834
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02007835
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01007836/*
7837 * Local variables:
7838 * fill-column: 79
7839 * End:
7840 */